Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Release 7.0 System Programming Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Lucent Technologies Manuals
  4. Conference System
  5. MERLIN LEGEND Release 7.0
  6. System programming manual

Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Release 7.0 System Programming Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for MERLIN LEGEND Release 7.0:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System
Release 7.0

System Programming

®
555-670-111
Comcode 108370271
Issue 1
April 1999

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the MERLIN LEGEND Release 7.0 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Related Manuals for Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Release 7.0

Summary of Contents for Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Release 7.0

  • Page 1: System Programming

    ® MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 Comcode 108370271 Issue 1 April 1999...

  • Page 2: April 1999

    Lucent Technologies does not warrant that this product is immune from or will prevent unauthorized use of common-carrier telecommunication services or facilities accessed through or connected to it. Lucent Technologies will not be responsible for any charges that result from such unauthorized use.

  • Page 3: Ordering Information

    Support Telephone Number In the continental US, Lucent Technologies provides a toll-free customer helpline 24 hours a day. Call the Lucent Technologies Helpline at 1-800-628-2888 or your Lucent Technologies authorized dealer if you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system. Outside the continental US, contact your local Lucent Technologies authorized representative.

  • Page 5: Table Of Contents

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Contents Contents New Features and Enhancements xxiii Release 7.0 Enhancements (April 1999) xxiii MLS and Enhanced Tip/Ring (ETR) Telephone Support xxiii Expanded Digital Endpoint Connectivity xxiv Voice Announce on Idle Only Option on MLX Telephones xxiv Priority Call Queuing...
  • Page 6 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Contents Additional Network Switch and Services Options for ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) Improvements to Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) and Support for MERLIN LEGEND Reporter Application MERLIN LEGEND Reporter xlii Maintenance Enhancements...
  • Page 7 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Contents Installation, Upgrade Administration, and Maintenanceli User Features Additional Application Packages, Adjuncts, and Adapter Enhancements liii Release 2.1 Enhancements (August 1994) Operational Installation and Hardware Equipment and Operations Additional Application Packages, Telephones, Adjuncts, and Adapter Release 2.0 Enhancements...
  • Page 8 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Contents viii Programming Basics Overview Introduction to System Programming Planning Forms Types of Programming System Programming Console Console Components Console Buttons Console Overlay Console and DSS Lights Programming Procedures 1-10 Procedure Organization...
  • Page 9 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Contents Initializing the SPM Software 2-10 Connecting the PC 2-13 Direct Local Connection 2-13 Local Modem Connection 2-15 Remote Modem Connection 2-16 Accessing SPM 2-17 Direct Local Connection 2-17 Local or Remote Modem Connection 2-19...
  • Page 10 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Contents System Programming Position Assignment System Language Board Renumbering Mode of Operation 3-10 Automatic Maintenance Busy 3-12 Set System Date 3-15 Set System Time 3-17 System Renumbering 3-19 Select System Numbering Plan 3-22...
  • Page 11 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Contents DS1 Facilities 3-109 Type of DS1 Facility 3-109 Switched 56 Dial Plan Routing 3-127 Frame Format 3-131 Zero Code Suppression 3-133 Signaling Mode 3-136 Line Compensation 3-138 Channel Service Unit 3-140...
  • Page 12 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Contents Terminal Equipment Identifier 3-221 Dial Plan Routing 3-223 Outgoing Tables 3-237 Network Selection Tables 3-237 Special Services Tables 3-241 Call-by-Call Service Table 3-249 BRI Facilities 3-261 Service Profile Identifier (SPID) and Directory Number (DN) 3-261...
  • Page 13 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Contents xiii ARS Restriction Level for Extensions 3-334 Forced Account Code Entry 3-337 Microphone Operation 3-339 Authorization Codes 3-341 Remote Call Forwarding 3-344 Delayed Call Forwarding 3-347 Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer 3-350 Primary Cover Ring Delay...
  • Page 14 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Contents Group Calling Line/Trunk or Pool Assignments 3-419 Priority Call Queuing 3-422 Optional Group Calling Features 3-425 Hunt Type 3-425 Group Calling Delay Announcements 3-428 Group Calling Announcement Interval 3-431 Group Calling Repeat Announcement 3-434...
  • Page 15 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Contents Host System Dial Codes for Behind Switch Mode 3-502 Recall Timer 3-504 Interdigit Timers 3-506 Allowed Lists 3-507 Assign Allowed Lists to Extensions 3-509 Disallowed Lists 3-511 Assign Disallowed Lists to Extensions 3-514...
  • Page 16 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Contents Night Service with Outward Restriction 3-599 Night Service with Time Set 3-604 Night Service with Coverage Control 3-607 Labeling 3-609 Extension Directory 3-609 Lines or Trunks 3-612 Posted Message 3-614...
  • Page 17 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Contents xvii Alarm 4-18 Authorization Code 4-18 Auto Answer All 4-18 Auto Answer Intercom 4-19 Auto Dial 4-19 Automatic Line Selection 4-19 Barge-In 4-20 Callback 4-20 Caller Number and Name on Caller ID 4-21 Call Waiting 4-22...
  • Page 18 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Contents xviii Ringing/Idle Line Preference 4-36 Ringing Options 4-37 Saved Number Dial 4-38 Send/Remove Message 4-39 Service Observing 4-39 Signaling 4-40 System Access/Intercom Buttons 4-40 System Speed Dial 4-41 Transfer 4-42...
  • Page 19 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Contents Choosing Passwords A-19 Physical Security A-19 Limiting Outcalling A-19 Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability A-20 Limitation of Liability A-21 Remote Administration and Maintenance A-21 Menu Hierarchy Overview LED Displays Overview...
  • Page 20 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Contents Allowed Lists Report F-25 Access to Allowed Lists Report F-26 Disallowed Lists Report F-27 Access to Disallowed Lists Report F-28 Automatic Route Selection Report F-29 Extension Directory Report F-30 System Directory Report F-31...

  • Page 21: Important Safety Instructions

    Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone wiring has been disconnected at the network interface. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Use only Lucent Technologies-manufactured MERLIN LEGEND Communications System circuit modules, carrier assemblies, and power units in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System control unit.

  • Page 22: Save These Instructions

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Do not attach the power supply cord to building surfaces. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it.

  • Page 23: New Features And Enhancements

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 New Features and Enhancements Release 7.0 Enhancements (April 1999) New Features and Enhancements Release 7.0 Enhancements (April 1999) Release 7.0 includes all Release 6.1 functionality, plus the enhancements listed below.

  • Page 24: Expanded Digital Endpoint Connectivity

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 New Features and Enhancements Release 7.0 Enhancements (April 1999) xxii programmed to support either T/R or ETR, but not both simultaneously. This module does not have a separate PFT port. In the event of a power failure, port 12 becomes the PFT port for line 1.

  • Page 25: Priority Call Queuing

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 New Features and Enhancements Release 7.0 Enhancements (April 1999) xxiii Priority Call Queuing Priority call queuing provides the ability to: Place some callers ahead of others who are waiting for the same agent group.

  • Page 26: Mlx Headset Operation

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 New Features and Enhancements Release 7.0 Enhancements (April 1999) xxiv MLX Headset Operation Headset operation in Release 7.0 has been enhanced so that MLX headset operation more closely mimics the handset operation in the following ways: When a person is on a call using a headset and the headset auto-answer is turned on, the user hears a short ring when another call is coming in.

  • Page 27: Prior Releases: Features And Enhancements

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 6.1 Enhancements (August 1998) Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 6.1 Enhancements (August 1998) Release 6.1 includes all Release 6.0 functionality plus the enhancements listed below.
  • Page 28 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 6.1 Enhancements (August 1998) xxvi Centralized Voice Messaging One or more MERLIN LEGEND Systems (Release 6.1 or later) can share the voice messaging system (VMS) of another MERLIN LEGEND System, provided the systems are directly connected to the system with the VMS.
  • Page 29 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 6.1 Enhancements (August 1998) xxvii Group Coverage. Group Coverage can be provided across a private network to a VMS, a non-local calling group, a QCC queue, a DLC, or any individual extension on the remote system.

  • Page 30: Service Observing

    PRI Switch Type Test A new maintenance test, the PRI Switch Type Test, has been created to allow Lucent Technologies technicians or authorized dealers to automatically determine if each end of the PRI tandem trunks has been programmed correctly. The test ®...

  • Page 31: Windows Nt Driver

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 6.0 Enhancements (February 1998) xxix appear on WinSPM. Supported in Windows 95 Windows NT, and Windows 98, WinSPM is also backwards-compatible with previous DOS versions of SPM and is available on CD-ROM.
  • Page 32 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 6.0 Enhancements (February 1998) addition, system managers can control whether calling name, calling number, or both are shown at MLX display telephones for incoming calls across PRI tandem trunks.

  • Page 33: Group Calling Enhancements

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 6.0 Enhancements (February 1998) xxxi Voice Mail and Auto Attendant. Networked systems (prior to Release 6.1) should have their own local voice mail and/or auto attendant applications as well as their own external alerts and Music-On-Hold sources.

  • Page 34: Centrex Transfer Via Remote Call Forwarding

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 6.0 Enhancements (February 1998) xxxii Prompt-Based Overflow System managers can activate the Prompt-Based Overflow option. This option allows callers waiting in queue and listening to a delay announcement to press the # key in order to reach the overflow receiver for the group, which may be the QCC queue or another calling group (including a calling group assigned for a voice mail system).

  • Page 35: Authorization Codes And Remote Call Forwarding

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System to a LAN server running Novell ® NetWare software allows Lucent Technologies-certified telephony applications to control and monitor MLX and analog multiline telephone (BIS only) operations. The physical connection for the CTI link is an MLX port on a 008 MLX or 408 MLX module on the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System control unit and an ISDN link interface card plugged into the customer’s server.
  • Page 36 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 5.0 Enhancements (June 1997) xxxiv NOTES: The NetWare server software version must be 3.12, 4.1, or 4.11. The 008 MLX and 408 MLX modules must have a firmware vintage other than 29.

  • Page 37: Hotline Feature

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 5.0 Enhancements (June 1997) xxxv NOTE: In the case of remote access calls, the only information that the application can collect about the caller is the remote telephone number.

  • Page 38: Group Calling Enhancements

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 5.0 Enhancements (June 1997) xxxvi Any type of inside or outside line that is normally available to a single-line telephone can be assigned to a HotLine extension. Generally, the HotLine telephone does not receive calls, and its lines should be set to No Ring.
  • Page 39 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 5.0 Enhancements (June 1997) xxxvii The primary and secondary announcement options, when used together, allow an initial message to play for callers, followed by a repeating announcement that, for example, urges callers to stay on the line and wait for a calling group member.

  • Page 40: Mlx-5 And Mlx-5D Telephones

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 4.2 Enhancements (June 1997) xxxviii MLX-5 and MLX-5D Telephones The MLX-5 nondisplay and MLX-5D display telephones are compatible with all system releases. The display telephone includes a 2-line by 24-character display, and both telephones come with five line buttons.
  • Page 41 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 4.2 Enhancements (June 1997) xxxix — MCI 900 service numbers. LEC services for DMS-100 switch types: — DMS Virtual Private Network service for calls between the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System and another communications system (such as another MERLIN LEGEND Communications System).
  • Page 42 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 4.2 Enhancements (June 1997) — The call is answered by someone not a member of an Auto Login or Auto Logout calling group. An exclamation point (!) signals that an Auto Login or Auto Logout agent handled a call that was answered by someone who was not a member of that Auto Login or Auto Logout with Overflow group.
  • Page 43 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 4.1 Enhancements (June 1997) Enhanced Extension Information Report Beginning with Release 4.2, the Extension Information Report includes the Extension Status and supervisory mode of each extension. Release 4.1 Enhancements (June 1997) Release 4.1 includes all Release 4.0 functionality, plus the enhancements listed...
  • Page 44 Network-1 Basic Rate Interface) Provisioning Test Tool is enhanced to include testing for BRI facilities that are part of Multiline Hunt Groups (MLHGs). The NI-1 BRI Provisioning Test Tool is used by Lucent Technologies maintenance personnel on MERLIN LEGEND Communications Systems that include an 800 NI-BRI module.
  • Page 45 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 4.0 Enhancements (March 1996) xliii Release 4.0 Enhancements (March 1996) Release 4.0 includes all Release 3.1 functionality, plus the enhancements listed below.
  • Page 46 PCMCIA technology. Support for 2B Data Applications A Lucent Technologies-certified group and desktop video application can use two B-channels to make video/data calls when connected to a single MLX extension jack programmed for 2B data. The 2B data devices must be equipped with ISDN-BRI interfaces.
  • Page 47 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 4.0 Enhancements (March 1996) Voice Announce on Queued Call Console The system manager can enable the fifth Call button on a QCC console (Hybrid/ PBX mode only) to announce a call on another user’s speakerphone (providing the destination telephone has a voice announce-capable SA button available).
  • Page 48 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 3.1 Enhancements (March 1996) xlvi Release 3.1 Enhancements (March 1996) Release 3.1 includes all Release 3.0 functionality, plus the enhancements listed below.
  • Page 49 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 3.1 Enhancements (March 1996) xlvii Disallowed List Including Numbers Often Associated with Toll Fraud A factory-set Disallowed List 7 contains default entries, which are numbers frequently associated with toll fraud.
  • Page 50 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 3.0 Enhancements (August 1994) xlviii New Maintenance Procedure for Testing Outgoing Trunks Technicians must enter a password in order to perform trunk tests. SECURITY ALERT: The enhancements in Release 3.1 help increase the security of the MERLIN LEGEND System.
  • Page 51 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 3.0 Enhancements (August 1994) xlix — 2500YMGL and 2500 MMGL (single-line desk telephones, selectable positive disconnect). ™ — Picasso Still-Image telephone (for interactive display of still images).
  • Page 52 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 3.0 Enhancements (August 1994) User Features Security The Remote Access feature allows people at remote locations to enter the system by dialing the number of a line or trunk designated for remote access. The system can be programmed to require the remote user to dial a barrier code (a type of password) after reaching the system.
  • Page 53 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 3.0 Enhancements (August 1994) Direct Voice Mail If your company has voice mail, this feature allows you to dial a co-worker’s voice mailbox directly without ringing that person’s extension.
  • Page 54 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 2.1 Enhancements (August 1994) Fax Mail. Allows subscribers to send fax messages, get fax messages, record personal greetings, and program outcalling. Fax Broadcast.
  • Page 55 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 2.1 Enhancements (August 1994) liii An inside call on hold at an SA button can be picked up and transferred by any person with a Shared SA button corresponding to the button with the held call.
  • Page 56 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 2.1 Enhancements (August 1994) A new 012 (tip/ring) module [apparatus code 517G13 (28) or higher letter] contains a built-in ring generator. The maximum ring equivalency number (REN) supported is 2.2, and the module will ring four ports at one time.
  • Page 57 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 2.0 Enhancements (October 1992) A new digital Magic On Hold unit is available in three configurations: — Basic Prerecorded Package — Personalized Package —...
  • Page 58 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 2.0 Enhancements (October 1992) Integrated Administration provides a single interface through Integrated Solution III (IS III) for programming entries common to the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System and AUDIX™...
  • Page 59 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 2.0 Enhancements (October 1992) lvii Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk emulation on a T1 facility provides up to 24 DID channels on a single DS1 interface, instead of requiring 24 separate physical trunks.
  • Page 60 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 1.1 Enhancements (October 1992) lviii Maintenance Maintenance enhancements include the following: Clear descriptions of module test failures Optional printing of hard copy of error logs Display that correlates extension numbers with slot/port and logical ID Display showing which slots, trunks, and extensions are maintenance busy Internal digital switching element (DSE) loopback test for all modules...
  • Page 61 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 1.1 Enhancements (October 1992) Programming and Maintenance Programming and maintenance enhancements include the following: Additional Inspect capability in system programming. Editing capability (Backspace selection) in extension programming. Improvements to system reports.
  • Page 62 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 1.1 Enhancements (October 1992)

  • Page 63: About This Guide

    ‘‘Related Documents,” later in this section, provides a complete list of system documentation, together with ordering information. In the USA only, Lucent Technologies provides a toll-free customer Helpline 24 hours a day. Call the Helpline at 1-800-628-2888 (consultation charges may...

  • Page 64: Terms And Conventions Used

    About This Guide Terms and Conventions Used lxii apply), or contact your Lucent Technologies representative if you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system. Outside the USA, if you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system, contact your Lucent Technologies authorized representative.
  • Page 65 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 About This Guide Terms and Conventions Used lxiii Old Term New Term digital data-only station terminal adapter data-only workstation 7500B data-only station ISDN terminal adapter data-only workstation digital voice and MLX voice and digital data station...
  • Page 66 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 About This Guide Security lxiv Product Safety Advisories Throughout these documents, hazardous situations are indicated by an exclamation point inside a triangle and the word CAUTION or WARNING . WARNING: Warning indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause death or severe personal injury if the hazard is not avoided.

  • Page 67: Related Documents

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 About This Guide Security Related Documents The documents listed in the following table are part of the MERLIN LEGEND documentation set. Within the continental United States, contact the Lucent Technologies BCS Publications Center by calling 1-800-457-1235.
  • Page 68 If the feedback form is missing, write directly to: Documentation Manager Lucent Technologies 211 Mount Airy Road, Room 2W-330 Basking Ridge, NJ 07920...

  • Page 69: Programming Basics

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Overview Programming Basics Overview This chapter presents the information you need to master before you begin the programming procedures covered in Chapter ‘‘Programming Procedures.” It covers the following subjects: An introduction to system programming basics How to use the system programming console...

  • Page 70: Introduction To System Programming

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Introduction to System Programming Introduction to System Programming The communications system offers easy-to-use, menu-driven software for system programming. After your system is installed, use this software to accommodate your company’s changing needs for such enhancements and modifications as upgraded lines, additional modules, and new extension programming.

  • Page 71: Types Of Programming

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Introduction to System Programming Types of Programming The three types of programming available for the communications system are: System Programming. This type of programming enables the system manager to program features that affect all or most system users, and requires one of the following: —...

  • Page 72: System Programming Console

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics System Programming Console System Programming Console The system programming console is an MLX-20L telephone connected to the system programming jack. When you begin system programming on a new system for the first time, the console must be connected to the first jack on the first 008 MLX module or 408 GS/LS-MLX module (Release 2.0 and later versions).

  • Page 73: Console Components

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics System Programming Console Console Components Table 1-1 Table 1-2 provide descriptions of the components that make up the MLX-20L Console and the Direct Station Selector (DSS). Refer to Figure 1-1 the location of the components.

  • Page 74: Console Buttons

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics System Programming Console Table 1-1. MLX-20L Console Components — Continued Component Function Message Light A red light that signals a waiting message. User Cards A slide-out drawer with erasable cards for noting telephone numbers and Tray and feature codes.
  • Page 75 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics System Programming Console More Home MENU MODE: Select Feature Press HOME to Exit Menu Inspct Directory Messages Posted Msg Sys Program Alarm Clock Maintenance Timer Ext Program Figure 1-2.

  • Page 76: Console Overlay

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics System Programming Console screen selections. For example, to save an entry, you select Enter on the console or press 0 on your PC. See Chapter ‘‘Programming with SPM,”...

  • Page 77: Console And Dss Lights

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics System Programming Console button on the console to program each line/trunk. The bottom line of numbers next to each line button on the console overlay represents the twenty lines/trunks associated with each line button (see Figure 1-3).

  • Page 78: Programming Procedures

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-10 Programming Procedures The programming procedures provide step-by-step instructions for programming the communications system. This section details how to make the best use of the programming procedures.

  • Page 79: Programming Screens

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-11 This list is followed by the step-by-step procedure for programming the feature. ‘‘Using the Programming Procedures’’ on page 1-14 for complete information about how to use the programming procedures.
  • Page 80 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-12 Figure 1-6 shows a sample menu selection screen. System Programming: > Screen title and More indicator ( > Make a Selection Prompt Options List System Extensions...

  • Page 81: Verifying Data Entry

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-13 An exception is the slot/port number which is displayed as sspp to distinguish the 2-digit slot number from the 2-digit port number. Many screens show data entered on a previous screen, such as an extension or trunk number.

  • Page 82: Using The Programming Procedures

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-14 After you enter and save 7108, the system automatically assigns the next sequential extension jack number. This extension jack pair does not appear on the data entry screen;...
  • Page 83 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-15 Format The programming procedures are presented as numbered steps in the sample format shown below. Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. The step instruction is shown here. Console Display Press here On the PC, press the function key that...
  • Page 84 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-16 corresponds to the highlighted console option is shown in the right column under the PC header. When more than one but fewer than six options can be selected from the screen, each console key for each option is highlighted in gray, as shown in sample Step 3 below.
  • Page 85 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-17 The screen shown in sample Step 1 displays three menu selections for the Network Services feature. The procedure is broken into three branches (or branch procedures) to accommodate the three menu options.
  • Page 86 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-18 Each branch procedure is self-contained and begins with Step 1. Be sure to complete all of the steps in a branch procedure before you return to the main procedure.

  • Page 87: Saving Entries And Moving Among Screens

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-19 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 2. And so on..3. Return to Step 6 of the main procedure. Block-of-Lines Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1.
  • Page 88 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-20 Table 1-4 contains details on the use of the screen keys. Table 1-4. Screen Keys Display PC Key Function Change your entry. Select Backspace ( BackSpace on the PC) to correct your entry.

  • Page 89: Using Enter

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-21 Using Enter Pressing Enter to save your entry produces one of the following results: The next screen in the procedure appears. The screen does not change and you can enter another extension or line/ trunk.

  • Page 90: System Programming Hierarchy

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-22 Next return you to the correct screen to continue programming as shown in Step 2 in the example below. NOTE: If you plan to take advantage of this key, remember to enter the lowest number in the sequence at the first prompt.
  • Page 91 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-23 Main menu options are shown in a separate box. First-level options are bold; second-level options are preceded by an asterisk (*). The remaining levels are shown with increasing degrees of indentation.
  • Page 92 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-24 Option Description Page SysRenumber Default extension numbering plans 3-19 Default Numbering * 2-Digit * 3-Digit * SetUp Space Single extension renumbering 3-25 Single * Lines Lines/Trunks...
  • Page 93 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-25 Option Description Page Operator System operator positions 3-42 Positions * Direct Line Direct-Line Console (DLC) 3-46 * Queued Call Queued Call Console (QCC) 3-43 QCC optional features (Hybrid/PBX mode 3-374...
  • Page 94 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-26 Option Description Page Continued Operator - Priority - Operator - GrpCoverage Group Coverage calls - Priority - Operator * Msg Center Message center operation 3-394 * ExtndComplt Extended call completion...
  • Page 95 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-27 Option Description Page LinesTrunks Lines/Trunks options Loop-start, ground-start or DS1 options LS/GS/DS1 * (DS1) DS1 options - Type Type of DS1 facility 3-109 - T1 - GroundStart...
  • Page 96 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-28 Option Description Page LinesTrunks Continued - All S56Data All Switched 56 Data - Direction - Intype - Outtype - AnsSupv - Disconnect - Inmode - Outmode -PRI...
  • Page 97 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-29 Option Description Page LinesTrunks Continued - ChannelUnit Type of equipment provided by local 3-140 service provider - Foreign Exchange - Special Access * (4xx GS/LS) Line/Trunk type for 4xx GS/LS module - GroundStart...
  • Page 98 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-30 Options Description Page Continued LinesTrunks - Type 5 * Inmode Set incoming tie trunk to touch-tone or rotary * Outmode Set outgoing tie trunk to touch-tone or rotary * Dialtone Tie trunk dial tone...
  • Page 99 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-31 Options Description Page LinesTrunks Continued * B-ChannelGRP Assign B-channel groups 3-191 - Lines Assign lines to B-channel groups 3-191 - Network Serv Network service 3-197 AT&T toll service...
  • Page 100 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-32 Options Description Page LinesTrunks Continued - Copy PhnNum to NumToSend - Do Not Copy Telephone Number - IncomingRtg Incoming Routing 3-207 - Routing by Dial Plan - Route by Line Appearance...
  • Page 101 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-33 Options Description Page LinesTrunks Continued *DialPlanRtg Dial Plan Routing 3-223 - Service Service - AT&T Toll AT&T toll service - Megacom 800 - ACCUNET SDS - SoftDefNetw - MULTI QUEST...
  • Page 102 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-34 Options Description Page LinesTrunks Continued - Typeof Number - National - International - DeleteDigit - CBC Service Call-by-Call service 3-249 - Patterns - Voice/Data - Voice Only - Data Only...
  • Page 103 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-35 Options Description Page LinesTrunks Continued - VirtPrivNet - Misc Miscellaneous service - Other - No Service - Delete Digit Number of digits to delete * Switch Type Type of switch at far end 3-185...
  • Page 104 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-36 Options Description Page LinesTrunks Continued - ARS Restrict Non-Tie trunk ARS Facility Restriction Level - Allow List Non-Tie trunk Allowed Lists assignment - DisallowLst Non-Tie trunk Disallowed Lists assignment...
  • Page 105 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-37 Options Description Page LinesTrunks Continued - Allow List Remote Access with barrier code: Allowed Lists - DisallowLst Remote Access with barrier code: Disallowed Lists * AutoQueuing Automatic Callback on busy pools or...
  • Page 106 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-38 Options Description Page LinesTrunks Continued - T305 Timer - T308 Timer Switched 56 Dial Plan Routing 3-127 T1 Data NW Switch identifiers for remote systems 3-103 connected to tandem trunks * SwNum-Single...
  • Page 107 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-39 Options Description Page Extensions Lines or trunks (buttons on a telephone) 3-268 LinesTrunks Copy outside line/trunk options 3-274 Line Copy * Single * Block Pool dial-out code restrictions 3-324...
  • Page 108 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-40 Options Description Page Extensions Continued * GrpCoverage Group Coverage receiver 3-358 * Message Group Calling message waiting indicator 3-445 * Queue Alarm Group Calling Calls-In-Queue Alarm threshold 3-448 - Alarm Threshold 1...
  • Page 109 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-41 Options Description Page Extensions Continued * Primary * Secondary Enable/disable HotLine 3-361 HotLine Preference for incoming call display 3-363 DisplayPref * Calling Name * Calling Num * Both Service Observing...
  • Page 110 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-42 Options Description Page Options Continued Camp-On return time 3-472 CampOn Call Park return time 3-474 CallParkTrn Delay Ring Number of rings for the Delay Ring 3-476 interval Callback request number of rings...
  • Page 111 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-43 Options Description Page Options Continued * QCC Queue * Extension * Grp Calling BehndSwitch Host system (Behind Switch mode) dial 3-502 codes * Transfer for Transfer, * Conference...
  • Page 112 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-44 Options Description Page Tables Establish Allowed Lists 3-507 Allow List Allow To Assign an Allowed List to a given 3-509 extension Establish a Disallowed List 3-511 Disallow Disallow To...
  • Page 113 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-45 Options Description Page Tables Continued * Dial 0 Dial 0 Table 3-572 - ARS Pool - ARS FRL - ARS Digits * Sub A Data Voice and/or data routing for Subpattern A 3-576 - Voice Only...
  • Page 114 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-46 Options Description Pages AuxEquip Line/trunk jack for a music source 3-297 Music-On-Hold Loudspeaker Paging equipment 3-300 Ldspkr Pg 3-302 * Extensions Extension jack to be used for a fax machine * Msg Waiting Message waiting indication...
  • Page 115 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-47 Options Description Page NightSrvce Night Service group assignment 3-595 GroupAssign * Extensions * Calling Grp * Lines * CoverContrl Password for use with out of hours calls 3-599 OutRestrict Emergency...
  • Page 116 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-48 Options Description Pages Data Data Options Voice/Data Analog multiline telephones with voice 3-632 and data Enable 2B Data at MLX port 3-634 2B Data Options Description...
  • Page 117 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-49 Options Description Pages Print Continued 3-625 Extension Information report Ext Info Group Coverage Information report GrpCoverage Direct Group Calling Information report Grp Calling Night Service Information report NightService Group Call Pickup report...
  • Page 118 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Programming Procedures 1-50 Options Description Pages Language Language options System language SystemLang * English * French * Spanish Extensions Language for a single extension or block 3-319 of extensions * Single...

  • Page 119: Access To System Programming From The Mlx-20L Console

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Access to System Programming from the MLX-20L Console 1-51 Access to System Programming from the MLX-20L Console Follow the steps below to begin system programming. All of the procedures in Chapter ‘‘Programming Procedures”...

  • Page 120: System Programming Menu

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Access to System Programming from the MLX-20L Console 1-52 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Display the System Programming menu. On the System Set-up screen, system System Set-up: Review and Exit information appears in place of the x’s .
  • Page 121 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Access to System Programming from the MLX-20L Console 1-53 Table 1-5 describes the options. Table 1-5. System Programming Menu Options Option Description Set system operating conditions. System Select the system numbering plan and/or reassign extension SysRenumber...

  • Page 122: Idle States

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Idle States 1-54 Exiting System Programming Use the information in Table 1-6 to return to the System Programming menu, the main menu (Menu Mode screen), or the Home screen from within a programming screen.

  • Page 123: System Forced Idle

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Idle States 1-55 System Busy Pls Wait :nnnn S/P:ss/pp nnnn = a previously entered extension Dial Code ss/pp = the slot and port number of the busy extension Exit Enter...

  • Page 124: Extension Forced Idle

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Idle States 1-56 paragraph). The following procedures can be performed only when the line or trunk being programmed is idle: Identify loudspeaker paging extension jack Assign trunks to pools Specify incoming or outgoing DID or tie-trunk type Specify tie-trunk direction...

  • Page 125: Forced Idle Reminder Tones

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Idle States 1-57 Forced Idle Reminder Tones The forced idle reminder tone is a high-low “doorphone” tone—400 ms of 667-Hz tone followed by 400 ms of 571-Hz tone. The tone is provided under the following circumstances: At the extension, to remind the user that the system or the extension is in the forced idle state.
  • Page 126 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Basics Idle States 1-58...

  • Page 127: Programming With Spm

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Overview Programming with SPM Overview The System Programming and Maintenance (SPM) software package offers an alternate method of programming the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System using a PC.

  • Page 128: System Requirements

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM System Requirements those tasks most commonly performed by the system manager (for example, add or delete members of groups, perform system inventories, create reports, administer multiple systems, make station labels shown on display telephones, and more).
  • Page 129 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM System Requirements A serial port that can use either a DB-9 or DB-25 connector NOTE: For a DB-9 connector, use a 9-pin to 25-pin adapter to attach the 25-pin connector of the RS-232 interface cable.

  • Page 130: Installing The Spm Software

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software NOTE: SPM uses Interrupt 4 and I/O address 3F8 for COM1. It uses Interrupt 3 and I/O address 2F8 for COM2. Installing the SPM Software Before you install or run SPM, it is recommended that you use diskcopy on a DOS PC (see your operating system guide) to make a backup copy of the SPM disk.
  • Page 131 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software — Adds the line SET AMS_PATH=C: — Adds the background print command: PRINT /D:PRN /B:4096 /U:3 /M:200 /S:1 >NUL Adds the following line to config.sys, if it is not already present: DEVICE=C:\ANSI.SYS Copies the ansi.sys file from the floppy disk to c:\.

  • Page 132: Dos Installation With Windows 95

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Because English is the default language, install and install english have the same result. If you do use the language argument (english, french, or spanish), you must type it in lowercase letters as shown.
  • Page 133 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software If you typed install (the command for DOS installation) instead of instal95, checks that your PC has Windows 95 installed. If Windows 95 is detected, you see an error message that tells you to run the Instal95 program.
  • Page 134 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Method 2 – Install DOS SPM with French, Spanish, or English Language: From Windows Explorer, select the floppy drive that contains the backup copy of the SPM disk.
  • Page 135 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Press any key to continue installation. When SPM installation is complete the following message appears: Installation of SPM for DOS on your Windows 95 hard drive is now complete.

  • Page 136: Initializing The Spm Software

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software 2-10 Hiding the spm.exe and spm.bat Files To hide the spm.exe and spm.bat files, use the following steps: In Windows Explorer, select each file. From the File menu, select Properties.
  • Page 137 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software 2-11 Table 2-1. SPM Configuration File (ams.cfg) Options — Continued Specifies color monitor spm -color Specifies monochrome monitor spm -mono Specifies English as the PC language spm -1 english Specifies French as the PC language...
  • Page 138 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software 2-12 4. Select the communications port speed and press Speed: Type 1 for 1,200 bps. 1. 1200 Type 2 for 2,400 bps. 2.

  • Page 139: Connecting The Pc

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Connecting the PC 2-13 — If the PC is connected to the processor, the SPM Main Menu appears as shown in Step 8. — If the PC is not connected, go to ‘‘Connecting the PC’’...
  • Page 140 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Connecting the PC 2-14 Serial System Communications Programming Port Jack RS-232 355AF Adapter Turn powe r befor inser remo ting ving modu AG INPUT AG INPUT Figure 2-1.

  • Page 141: Local Modem Connection

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Connecting the PC 2-15 Processor Module SMDR Jack ADMIN Jack 355AF Adapter Crossover Cable EIA-232-D Tu rn er bef ins ert mo dul ovi ng AG INPUT Z3A2 ADU ADU Crossover Cable...

  • Page 142: Remote Modem Connection

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Connecting the PC 2-16 Serial Communications 012 (T/R) Port Port RS-232 MODEM Tur n inse er bef rtin g mo dule ovin AG INPUT Figure 2-3.

  • Page 143: Accessing Spm

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Accessing SPM 2-17 NOTE: Remote access (modem connection) has priority over local access (direct connection), unless a backup or restore procedure is in progress through a direct local connection.
  • Page 144 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Accessing SPM 2-18 Print Opts Password Monitor Language NOTE: The function keys shown on either side of the display are included here for quick reference. See ‘‘SPM Screens’’...

  • Page 145: Local Or Remote Modem Connection

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Accessing SPM 2-19 Local or Remote Modem Connection The method you use to access SPM by modem depends on whether you are programming onsite (locally) or from a remote location. If you are onsite, the modem must be connected to a T/R jack on an 012 (T/R) or 016 (T/R) module, or to a jack that has been programmed for T/R on a 412 LS-ID-ETR or 016 ETR module on the control unit.
  • Page 146 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Accessing SPM 2-20 The password prompt appears on the screen when the connection is made. (You may have to press more than once to get the password prompt.) If the PC is in a remote location and your system has not activated the Remote Access feature, do the following:...

  • Page 147: Using Spm

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-21 5. Type the SPM password to display the SPM Main Menu shown in Step 6. Enter Password: The password does not display as you type it. 6.

  • Page 148: Spm Screens

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-22 Password Print Options Restore System Programming NOTE: If you are using WinSPM, Backup, Restore, and Convert can be selected from the Main Menu. For Release 6.0 and later systems, the System Inventory option in the Quick Access mode provides a graphical representation of your system inventory, which includes all modules and versions.
  • Page 149 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-23 Figure 2-5. SPM Display through through display on either side of the console simulation screen. They represent the function keys to use when you select screen options.
  • Page 150 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-24 The labels in the column on the right side of the screen show key combinations that correspond to buttons on the MLX-20L telephone. Table 2-2 describes the function of PC keys in SPM.
  • Page 151 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-25 Table 2-2. Function of PC Keys in SPM — Continued PC Key Console SPM Function Browse. View print reports saved with Print Opts.

  • Page 152: Spm Main Menu Options

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-26 SPM Main Menu Options The SPM Main Menu provides access to system programming and to the SPM functions listed in Table 2-3.

  • Page 153: Spm Help

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-27 SPM Help To access the SPM help screens, press To review the Help screens press To return to the first help screen, press To exit from SPM help, press A typical help screen is shown in Figure...
  • Page 154 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-28 Determining the Release Number of a Backup File If you have a backup disk but do not know its release number, you may be able to find this information in the backup header.
  • Page 155 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-29 If you plan to store your backup file on a floppy disk, format a DOS disk. (DOS formatting can be done on either a UNIX System PC or a DOS PC). Uncompressed backup files are 100,000 to 210,000 bytes in size;...
  • Page 156 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-30 4. Specify a backup filename. To select the default filename, use the arrow keys to highlight backup.ams and press . Go to Step 6. To enter a different filename, use the arrow keys to select MAKE NEW FILE and press .

  • Page 157: Boards

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-31 If you abort the backup, the partial backup file is deleted to prevent restoration from a corrupted file and you see the screen shown in Step 8. When the backup is complete, you see the screen shown in Step 9.
  • Page 158 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-32 If you remove a board but do not replace it, and then perform a board renumber, the control unit will not recognize any boards that follow the empty slot.
  • Page 159 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-33 Table 2-5. Board Types — Continued Board Type Description 4 loop-start line jacks with Caller ID capability with 2 touch-tone 412LS/ETR receivers and 12 ETR extension jacks including 4 with tip/ring functionality 16 ETR extension jacks including 6 with tip/ring functionality...
  • Page 160 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-34 3. If the module you want to assign is not shown on the first screen of the Boards menu, press to display the next menu screen. Boards: Make a selection 400E&M...

  • Page 161: Browse

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-35 6. Assign or remove the module from the slot entered in previous Step. module name = option selected in Step 2 module name Enter slot numbers nn = slot entered in Step 5...

  • Page 162: Convert

    ‘‘Upgrading the System’’ on page 2-58. This procedure should be done only by Lucent Technologies personnel or your authorized dealer. To convert system programming to Release 7.0 format, version 7.15 or later of SPM is required. This version can be easily identified by the version number that appears on the last line of the console simulation window.
  • Page 163 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-37 Before you use the Convert option, you must complete the following tasks: Make sure you have the appropriate version of the SPM software. See ‘‘Upgrading the System’’...
  • Page 164 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-38 3. Use the arrow keys to highlight GOTO FLOPPY and press GOTO FLOPPY Please select file name FILENAME.WWW to convert from, FILENAME.XXX then press Enter.
  • Page 165 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-39 5. Observe the updated file selection screen and press FILENAME.XXX = backup filename selected in Step 4 Please select file name N = drive to convert from, then press Enter.
  • Page 166 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-40 8. Use the arrow keys to highlight GOTO FLOPPY and press Please select file name GOTO FLOPPY to convert to, or select MAKE NEW FILE NEW FILE to create a new FILENAME.XXX...
  • Page 167 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-41 The converted file cannot have the same name as the file from which you converted. If you specify the same filename, the following screen appears: If you continue, the old version will be deleted press ESC to abort,...

  • Page 168: Language

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-42 Language A language attribute in the SPM configuration file \spm\ams.cfg (DOS version) or /usr/ams/ams.cfg (UNIX System version) specifies whether SPM menus, pop-up windows, and other messages are presented in English, French, or Spanish.

  • Page 169: Maintenance

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-43 To select a different language for the current session, follow the steps below: 1. At the SPM Main Menu, press to select Language. SPM Main Menu Menu: Select Function Sys Program...

  • Page 170: Pass-Thru

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-44 Pass-Thru The Pass-Thru option allows qualified service personnel to program IS II/III applications on a remote PC. It permits you to establish a remote connection with the control unit to which the IS II/III PC is directly connected.
  • Page 171 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-45 NOTE: You cannot program the SPM application on the IS II/III PC because the remote call (from your SPM PC) uses the IS II/III PC’s COM1 port; therefore, the system programming jack cannot be used for system programming.
  • Page 172 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-46 2. Type your login name, and press Welcome to IS-II/III login: 3. Type the IS II/III password, and press Password: 4. Type ams for the terminal emulation type, and press Unix disk usage information Term=...

  • Page 173: Password

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-47 Password The Password option is used by qualified service personnel to change the modem connection password. A password is always required to establish a connection with the built-in modem.

  • Page 174: Print Options

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-48 3. Type the new password (any seven characters). Do not press Password Enter New Password SECURITY ALERT: The password does not appear on the screen as you type it. Always use the longest length password allowed on the system.

  • Page 175: Restore

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-49 To direct the output of the system programming reports, follow the steps below: 1. At the SPM Main Menu, press to select Print Opts. SPM Main Menu Menu: Select Function Sys Program...
  • Page 176 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-50 Considerations Review the following items before you begin the restore procedure: The system will be forced idle during a restore procedure. You must have a backup file containing system programming before you use this procedure.
  • Page 177 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Using SPM 2-51 To perform a restore, follow the steps below: 1. At the SPM Main Menu, press to select Restore. SPM Main Menu Menu: Select Function Sys Program Maintenance...

  • Page 178: System Programming

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM System Programming 2-52 If the file you select is not in the same format as the communications system, the screen below appears. To return to the SPM Main Menu, press .

  • Page 179: Basic Programming Information

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM System Programming 2-53 Basic Programming Information To begin programming, you must perform one of the following to display the System Programming menu on the MLX-20L console or PC: On the console: Menu Sys Program...
  • Page 180 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM System Programming 2-54 If a procedure requires that the system be in an idle state and the system is busy when you begin, the screen shown below displays. System Busy Pls Wait Dial Code: nnnn...
  • Page 181 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM System Programming 2-55 Assign trunks to pools Specify incoming or outgoing DID- or tie-trunk type Specify tie-trunk direction Specify tie-trunk E&M signal Extension Forced Idle When an extension is forced idle, no calls can be made or received on that extension.

  • Page 182: Accessing System Programming

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM System Programming 2-56 Accessing System Programming Follow the steps below to access system programming. 1. At the SPM Main Menu, press to select Sys Program. SPM Main Menu Menu: Select Function Sys Program...
  • Page 183 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM System Programming 2-57 2. Press the function key that corresponds to the report to be printed. Print (English): > Make a selection Trunk Info SysSet-up T1 Info Dial Plan...

  • Page 184: Upgrading The System

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System 2-58 Print to Floppy Disk Use the arrow keys to highlight GOTO FLOPPY: and press . Use one of the methods shown below. To print the reports to a floppy disk if the print file does not exist, use the arrow keys to highlight MAKE NEW FILE and press —...

  • Page 185: Before You Begin

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System 2-59 NOTE: MERLIN II Communications System programming cannot be upgraded to this communications system. The new communications system must be completely reprogrammed. Before You Begin Before you begin the upgrade to Release 7.0, you will need the following items: Any version of DOS SPM or WinSPM to backup system programming...

  • Page 186: Upgrade Procedure

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System 2-60 Upgrade Procedure The system upgrade procedure must follow the order of the steps shown below. 1. Back up your system programming. This step creates a file containing system programming information.
  • Page 187 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System 2-61 6. If a new processor module was installed in Step 5, proceed to Step 7. Otherwise, insert the R7.0 forced installation memory card into the PCMCIA Memory Card slot on the processor module.
  • Page 188 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System 2-62 For programming needed after upgrade to… See… Release 6.0 Table 2-14 Release 6.1 Table 2-15 Release 7.0 Table 2-16 Table 2-6. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 1.1 Feature Sequence...
  • Page 189 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System 2-63 Table 2-7. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 2.0 or 2.1 Feature Sequence Primary Rate SysProgram LinesTrunks LS/GS/DS1 Type Interface (PRI) SysProgram LinesTrunks LS/GS/DS1...
  • Page 190 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System 2-64 Table 2-8. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 3.0 Feature Sequence Automatic Backup SysProgram System Back/Restore Auto Backup Incoming Call Line More Drop LinesTrunks...
  • Page 191 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System 2-65 Table 2-10. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 4.0 Feature Sequence Delayed Call Extensions More Delay Frwd Dial ext. no. Forwarding Enter Dial no.
  • Page 192 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System 2-66 Table 2-11. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 4.1 Feature Sequence Group Coverage More More SysProgram Extensions Ring Delay sender’s extension Cover Delay Group Cover number of rings...
  • Page 193 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System 2-67 Table 2-11. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 4.1 — Continued Feature Sequence Switched 56 Data To select T1 All Tie: Switched 56 Data: Dial slot no.
  • Page 194 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System 2-68 Table 2-12. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 4.2 Feature Sequence SMDR Talk Time Enable or Options SMDR Talk Time Disable Enter Exit...
  • Page 195 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System 2-69 Table 2-12. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 4.2 — Continued Feature Sequence PRI Dial Plan Routing To specify MCI Toll Dial Plan Routing services for a DMS-250 or DEX600E switch type: SysProgram Exit...
  • Page 196 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System 2-70 Table 2-13. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 5.0 Feature Sequence CTI Link This is a Maintenance step. Start the procedure from the Main Menu, not the System Programming screen.
  • Page 197 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System 2-71 Table 2-13. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 5.0 — Continued Feature Sequence Group Calling Delay More Extensions Grp Calling Secondary Dial calling group ext.
  • Page 198 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System 2-72 Table 2-14. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 6.0 — Continued Feature Sequence More More Sys Program Extensions Dial ext. no. Select DisplayPre Enter...
  • Page 199 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System 2-73 Table 2-15. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 6.1 Feature Sequence Service To assign a Service Observer to a Service Observing group: Observing More More...

  • Page 200: Surrogate Mode Programming

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Surrogate Mode Programming 2-74 Table 2-16. Optional Programming after Upgrade to Release 7.0 Feature Sequence Voice Announce Dial ext. no. Extensions Enter SysProg Receive Choose a button Start ListFeat...
  • Page 201 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Surrogate Mode Programming 2-75 You do not “select” surrogate mode programming—you enter it automatically under the following conditions: The PC is connected to the lower RS-232 port on a control unit (direct local connection).
  • Page 202 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming with SPM Surrogate Mode Programming 2-76...

  • Page 203: Overview

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Overview Programming Procedures Overview This chapter contains all of the procedures required for programming each of the features and options that is available for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System.

  • Page 204: Basic System Operating Conditions

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Basic System Operating Conditions The procedures in this section are all related to the system, rather than to the operation of telephones, operator positions, lines, or trunks. These are operating conditions that must be set only once—when the system is new or when you reset the factory settings.
  • Page 205 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Valid Entries None Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure System Restart PC Procedure Procedure: System Restart Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the System menu. System Programming: Make a selection System...

  • Page 206: April

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Console/Display Instructions Additional Information The session is finished, and the system Restart restarts. You must enter system System is restarting programming again to continue. System Programming Position Assignment Use this procedure to reassign the extension used for system programming.
  • Page 207 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure Drop Dial ext. no. System SProg Port Enter Exit PC Procedure Type ext. no. Procedure: System Programming Position Assignment Console Display/Instructions Additional Information...

  • Page 208: System Language

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Select Enter. 6. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit. System Language Your communications system offers you a choice of three languages (English, French, and Spanish) for the following options: System Language.
  • Page 209 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions PC Procedure Select a language (English, French, or Spanish) Procedure: System Language Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu. System Programming: >...

  • Page 210: Board Renumbering

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Respond to the prompt. To set the system language, System Language: select Yes. All stations, SMDR, and printer will be affected To terminate the procedure and return to Do you want to continue?
  • Page 211 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions extension and line ports sequentially from left to right in the control unit and from bottom to top of each module. Summary: Board Renumbering Programmable by Qualified support personnel only...

  • Page 212: Mode Of Operation

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions 3-10 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Respond to the prompt. To continue the Board Renumbering Board Renumber: System will be down ..procedure, select Yes.
  • Page 213 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions 3-11 Queued Call Consoles (QCCs) and associated features Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Trunks System Access buttons Dial Plan Routing (PRI) Call-by-Call Services (PRI) The Ground-Start lines/trunks option cannot be programmed if the processor module has been modified for Permanent Key mode operation only.

  • Page 214: Automatic Maintenance Busy

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions 3-12 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Select Mode. System: Make a selection Restart MaintenBusy SProg Port Date Mode Time Board Renum Back/Restore Exit 3.
  • Page 215 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions 3-13 Summary: Automatic Maintenance Busy Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 1, System Planning Factory Setting Disabled Valid Entries Enabled, Disabled...
  • Page 216 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions 3-14 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Select Automatic Maintenance Busy. System: Make a selection Restart MaintenBusy SProg Port Date Mode Time Board Renum Back/Restore Exit...

  • Page 217: Set System Date

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions 3-15 Set System Date The System Date feature allows you to set the month, day, and year that appear on MLX display telephones and on Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) reports.
  • Page 218 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions 3-16 Procedure: Set System Date Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the System menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options...

  • Page 219: Set System Time

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions 3-17 Set System Time NOTES: The System Time feature allows you to set the time that appears on MLX, ETR, and MLS display telephones and on SMDR reports. If you are planning to use the SMDR feature, make sure the system time is set accurately.
  • Page 220 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions 3-18 Procedure: Set System Time Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the System menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options...

  • Page 221: System Renumbering

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Renumbering 3-19 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 6. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit. System Renumbering The procedures in this section are used to assign the 2-digit, 3-digit, and Set-Up- Space numbering plans for the local MERLIN LEGEND Communications System.
  • Page 222 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Renumbering 3-20 NOTE: Refer to the Network Reference for information on private networking and non-local dial plan numbering. Use the single renumbering procedure whenever the extension numbers you are changing from or to are not sequential .
  • Page 223 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Renumbering 3-21 Operator Console (not flexible) 0 Extensions 100 199 Extensions 200 299 MFMs/Terminal Adapters 300–399 MFMs/Terminal Adapters 400 499 500 599 600 699 Main Pool Calling Groups Paging...

  • Page 224: Select System Numbering Plan

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Renumbering 3-22 Select System Numbering Plan WARNING: To avoid possible loss of system programming information, renumber the system before you program the rest of the options described in this chapter. The three available local system numbering plans listed below appear on System Planning Form 2a.
  • Page 225 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Renumbering 3-23 CAUTION: Select Exit on the console, or on the PC, when you have finished selecting the numbering plan. If you press Home, extensions may remain in the forced idle condition (indicated when the LED next to each DSS button is on).
  • Page 226 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Renumbering 3-24 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Select Default Numbering. If you get the System Busy message, System: Make a selection wait for an idle condition, or exit system Default Numbering programming and try again later.

  • Page 227: Single Renumbering

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Renumbering 3-25 Single Renumbering Use this procedure to assign a specified extension number to a telephone, accessory, line, pool (Hybrid/PBX only), calling group, paging group, or Listed Directory Number.
  • Page 228 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Renumbering 3-26 Procedure: Single Renumbering Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the System Renumbering menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables...
  • Page 229 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Renumbering 3-27 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Select an item for renumbering. Press the button or function key à next to your selection. 5. Enter the old extension for the item selected (****) in Step 4. ****: If you get the Station Busy message, wait for an idle connection, or exit...

  • Page 230: Block Renumbering

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Renumbering 3-28 Block Renumbering Use this procedure to assign extension numbers to a group of extensions, accessories, or lines. Both the original numbers and the numbers they are being changed to must be sequentially numbered.
  • Page 231 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Renumbering 3-29 Procedure: Block Renumbering Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the System Renumber menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables...
  • Page 232 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Renumbering 3-30 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Select Enter. 6. Enter the currently assigned number for the last member of the group. nnnn = number entered in Step 4 Start at nnnn: **** = option name selected in Step 3...

  • Page 233: Non-Local Dial Plan Extension Ranges

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Renumbering 3-31 Non-Local Dial Plan Extension Ranges In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), the system manager can enter ranges of extensions for non-local systems networked to the local MERLIN LEGEND Communications System.
  • Page 234 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Renumbering 3-32 the PSTN, if necessary. For additional information about UDP routing, see ‘‘Uniform Dial Plan Routing’’ on page 3-579. WARNING: Use extreme caution when employing the Default Numbering option of System Renumbering.
  • Page 235 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Renumbering 3-33 System which have numbers in the DID range that terminate on a DEFINITY System. For details about UDP routing, see ‘‘Uniform Dial Plan Routing’’...
  • Page 236 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Renumbering 3-34 user can enter to reach an extension in the range (1–11) Dial no. of pattern for extension Enter range Enter Exit Exit PC Procedure Type no.
  • Page 237 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Renumbering 3-35 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Go to the next step. Select Enter. CAUTION: Pressing Enter does not save information until Step 10 of this procedure. 5.
  • Page 238 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Renumbering 3-36 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 9. Choose a pattern number to specify routes for call delivery (nn = 1–20). nnnn = number entered in Step 3 NL-UDP Range nnnn–xxxx : Enter pattern number xxxx = number entered in Step 5...
  • Page 239 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Renumbering 3-37 Procedure: Deleting Extension Ranges Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the System Renumber menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator...

  • Page 240: Direct Station Selector (Dss) Page Buttons

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Renumbering 3-38 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. The last extension number in the range is displayed. Delete the range. nnnn = number entered in Step 3 NonLocal UDP Start: nnnn : Enter ending number xxxx = ending number in range that...
  • Page 241 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Renumbering 3-39 Summary: Assign Direct Station Selector Page Buttons Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 6a, Optional Operator Features Factory Setting Page 1=0;...
  • Page 242 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Renumbering 3-40 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Select Single renumbering. System Renumber: Make a selection Default Numbering Single Block NonLocal UDP Exit 3. Go to the second screen of the System Renumber menu. System Renumber: >...
  • Page 243 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Renumbering 3-41 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 7. Erase the current dial code (nnnn). n = page button entered in Step 5 DSS Page Button n: Enter first dial code of group (multiple of 50) nnnn...

  • Page 244: System Operator Positions

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Operator Positions 3-42 System Operator Positions A system operator position, for a Queued Call Console (QCC) operator or a Direct-Line Console (DLC) operator, should be programmed before you program lines or trunks.

  • Page 245: Primary Operator Positions

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Operator Positions 3-43 NOTE: When you change an extension to an operator position, or vice versa, the system returns the port (extension jack) type of that extension to the factory setting.
  • Page 246 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Operator Positions 3-44 Summary: QCC Operator Positions Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition System idle Planning Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks Factory Setting Type: DLC Valid Entries First or fifth extension jack on MLX module (maximum:...
  • Page 247 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Operator Positions 3-45 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Queued Call (QCC). If you get the System Busy message, System Operator: Make a selection wait for an idle condition or exit Direct Line system programming and try again later.

  • Page 248: Dlc Operator Positions

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Operator Positions 3-46 DLC Operator Positions DLC operator positions can be assigned to the first and fifth extension jacks on the first modules with either digital or analog multiline extension jacks. A maximum of eight DLC operator positions can be assigned.
  • Page 249 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Operator Positions 3-47 Procedure: Identify or Remove DLC Operator Positions Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Operator menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber...
  • Page 250 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Operator Positions 3-48 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Specify the DLC extension as a DLC position. If no DSS is attached: DLC Operator Positions: Ã...

  • Page 251: Lines And Trunks

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-49 Lines and Trunks The procedures in this section are used to assign optional features to individual lines and trunks. The following optional features can be assigned: Type of Trunk Outmode Signaling for Loop- or Ground-Start Trunks Rotary Trunk Digit Transfer...

  • Page 252: Type Of Trunk

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-50 Type of Trunk Use this procedure to specify the type of trunk, loop-start (LS) or ground-start (GS), for each outside trunk connected to one of the following modules: 400 GS/LS 408 GS/LS 408 GS/LS-MLX...
  • Page 253 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-51 Procedure: Type of Trunk Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Lines and Trunks menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber...
  • Page 254 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-52 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Specify the type of trunks connected to the module. = 400 GS/LS, 408 GS/LS, **** GS/LS Slot xx: **** 408 GS/LS-MLX, 408 GS/LS-ID-MLX, 800 Select one...

  • Page 255: Outmode Signaling For Loop- Or Ground-Start Trunks

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-53 Outmode Signaling for Loop- or Ground-Start Trunks Use this procedure to identify either touch-tone signaling or rotary-dial signaling for outgoing calls placed by using the specified loop- or ground-start trunk. NOTE: Since the factory setting is touch-tone, this procedure is not required if your system has only touch-tone lines/trunks.
  • Page 256 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-54 Procedure: Outmode Signaling for Loop- or Ground-Start Trunks Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Lines and Trunks menu. System Programming: >...
  • Page 257 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-55 Single-Line Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify entry mode. Select Entry Mode. 2. Enter the number of the line/trunk with touch-tone dialing. OutTrunk Dial: Enter Trunks w/TouchTone Delete...

  • Page 258: Rotary Trunk Digit Transfer

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-56 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 2. Specify touch-tone or rotary signaling for each block. Toggle the green LED on or off as required: On = touch-tone Off = rotary 3.
  • Page 259 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-57 Procedure: Rotary Trunk Digit Transfer Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Options menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options...

  • Page 260: Ringing Frequency

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-58 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Select Enter. 6. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit. Ringing Frequency Use this procedure to program the ringing frequency on an 016 (T/R) module.
  • Page 261 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-59 Procedure: Ringing Frequency Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Options menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables...

  • Page 262: Second Dial Tone Timer

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-60 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Specify 20 Hz or 25 Hz. xx = slot number entered in Step 4 Ringing Freq: Slot xx: Select one 20Hz...
  • Page 263 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-61 PC Procedure Type second dial tone timer value (0–5000 ms, in increments of 200 ms) Procedure: Second Dial Tone Timer Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1.
  • Page 264 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-62 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Erase the current second dial tone timer. Second Dialtone Timer: Enter timeout (0–5000 ms, increments 200) xxxx Backspace Press Drop...

  • Page 265: Disconnect Signaling Reliability

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-63 Disconnect Signaling Reliability Use this procedure to classify the disconnect signal sent by the central office on loop-start trunks as one of the following: Reliable.
  • Page 266 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-64 Summary: Disconnect Signaling Reliability Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks Factory Setting Unreliable Valid Entries Unreliable, Reliable...

  • Page 267: Toll Type

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-65 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Loop-Start Disconnect. TouchTone/LS Disconnect: Make a selection Outmode LS Disconnect Exit 4. Specify the disconnect signal as reliable or unreliable. LS Reliable Disconnect: Select one Select Yes...
  • Page 268 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-66 Summary: Toll Type Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks Factory Setting Toll prefix required Valid Entries Required, Not required...
  • Page 269 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-67 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Select Toll Type. Lines and Trunks: > Make a selection LS/GS/DS1 TIE Lines Copy TT/LS Disc RemoteAccss Pools Exit...
  • Page 270 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-68 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 3. Assign or remove the toll prefix requirement from the line/trunk. Select Enter or Delete. You may continue to assign or remove the toll prefix requirement from additional lines/trunks by repeating Steps 2 and 3.

  • Page 271: Hold Disconnect Interval

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-69 Hold Disconnect Interval Use this procedure to specify the number of milliseconds before a loop-start line/trunk is released when a caller on hold hangs up and abandons the call. This can be specified as either a long interval (450 ms) or a short interval (50 ms).
  • Page 272 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-70 To program a block of lines/trunks: More Select LinesTrunks HoldDiscnct block of lines/trunks Toggle LED on/off Enter Exit Exit PC Procedure To program a single line/trunk: Type no.
  • Page 273 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-71 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Specify the hold disconnect line or lines. For a single line, go to: Hold Disconnect: Single-Line Procedure. Lines w/long interval Lines 01–20 Entry Mode...

  • Page 274: Principal User For Personal Line

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-72 Block Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify the block of 20 lines associated with 20 buttons on the system programming console. Select: Lines 01–20 Lines 21–40...
  • Page 275 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-73 Summary: Principal User for Personal Line Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone 4d, MLX Telephone 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX telephone 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment...
  • Page 276 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-74 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu. Lines and Trunks: > Make a selection LS/GS/DS1 TIE Lines Copy...

  • Page 277: Qcc Queue Priority Level

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-75 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 7. Assign or remove the extension as principal user. Select Enter or Delete. 8. Continue to assign a principal user to another line or trunk, or go to Step 9. Select Next.
  • Page 278 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-76 Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk: More Dial priority LinesTrunks QCC Prior level (1–7) Select entry mode Dial trunk Enter Enter Exit Exit...
  • Page 279 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-77 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select QCC Queue Priority. Lines and Trunks: > Make a selection HoldDiscnct LS-ID Delay PrncipalUsr ClockSync QCC Prior QCC Oper T1 Data NW...
  • Page 280 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-78 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Enter the line or trunk with the specified queue priority. QCC Priority x: Enter line/trunk number Ã...

  • Page 281: Qcc Operator To Receive Calls

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-79 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Assign the queue priority specified. Toggle the green LED on or off as required: On = to assign the queue priority Off = not to assign the queue priority 3.
  • Page 282 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-80 Valid Entries Extension number of first or fifth extension jack Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk: More Dial ext.
  • Page 283 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-81 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select QCC Operator. Lines and Trunks: > Make a selection HoldDiscnct PrncipalUsr QCC Prior QCC Oper Exit 4.
  • Page 284 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-82 Single-Line Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify entry mode. Select Entry Mode. 2. Enter the line/trunk assigned to ring into the QCC queue. QCC Operator xxxx: xxxx = extension number entered in Enter line/trunk number...

  • Page 285: Loop-Start Identification Delay

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-83 Block Procedure 1. Specify the block of 20 lines associated with the 20 line buttons on the system programming console. Select: Lines 01–20 Lines 21–40 Lines 41–60...
  • Page 286 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-84 Summary: Loop-Start Identification Delay Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks Factory Setting No delay Valid Entries Loop-start line/trunk numbers...
  • Page 287 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-85 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 2. Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu. Lines and Trunks: > Make a selection LS/GS/DS1 TIE Lines Copy...
  • Page 288 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-86 Single-Line Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify entry mode. Select Entry Mode. 2. Enter the line/trunk number for LS-ID Delay. LS-ID Delay: Enter Trunk Number for Alert Delay...

  • Page 289: Clock Synchronization

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-87 Block Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify the block of 20 lines associated with the 20 line buttons on the system programming console.
  • Page 290 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-88 Summary: Clock Synchronization Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity 100D module 3i, Incoming Trunks: BRI Options Factory Setting Primary clock: the first 100D module in the control unit...
  • Page 291 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-89 Procedure: Clock Synchronization Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Lines and Trunks menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options...
  • Page 292 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-90 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 5. Enter the slot number of the module to contain the primary system clock. Primary System Clock Enter slot number (1–17) Delete Backspace...
  • Page 293 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-91 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 10. Select Secondary. Clock Syncronization: Make a selection Primary Secondary Tertiary Exit 11. Enter the slot number of the module to contain the secondary system clock.
  • Page 294 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-92 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 14. Select the 800 NI-BRI module port to be the secondary clock source. Secondary Loop ClkSlot xx: Enter port number (1–8) Backspace Ã...

  • Page 295: Trunks To Pools Assignment

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-93 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 19. Specify whether the clock is to be synchronized to an outside endpoint (loop) or is to be free running (local), then go to Step 21. xx = slot number entered in Step 17 Tertry ClkSource Slot xx: Select one...
  • Page 296 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-94 In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), when dialing 10*** and 101**** equal access (Interexchange Carrier or IXC) calls via a private networked switch that is not connected to the public switched network, the private trunks must be assigned to the main pool.
  • Page 297 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-95 Summary: Trunks to Pools Assignment Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Trunk idle Planning Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks Factory Setting All loop-start trunks are assigned to the main trunk pool (factory-set extension number 70);...
  • Page 298 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-96 Procedure: Trunks to Pools Assignment Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Lines and Trunks menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber...
  • Page 299 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-97 Single-Line Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify entry mode. Select Entry Mode. 2. Enter the line/trunk number for the pool. Pool xxx: xxx = pool dial-out code entered in Step 3 Enter line/trunk number...

  • Page 300: Copy Options For Lines/Trunks

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-98 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Assign the appropriate lines/trunks to the pool. Toggle the red LED on or off as required: On = trunk is assigned to specified pool Off = trunk is not assigned to specified pool 3.
  • Page 301 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-99 If you are copying assignments to a block of lines/trunks and one of the lines or trunks is in use, you see the message Trunk Busy - Pls wait on your display.
  • Page 302 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-100 Procedure: Copy Options for Lines and Trunks Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Lines and Trunks menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions...
  • Page 303 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-101 Single-Trunk Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the trunk number to copy from. Copy Trunk Info From: Enter trunk number Ã...
  • Page 304 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks 3-102 Block-of-Trunks Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the trunk number to copy from. Copy Trunk: Enter copy from trunk number Ã...

  • Page 305: Uniform Dial Plan Facilities

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Facilities 3-103 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 5. Enter the last trunk number in the block to copy to. xxx = “start copy to” trunk entered START at Trunk xxx To: Enter ending trunk in Step 3...
  • Page 306 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Facilities 3-104 You can add a switch identifier to a block of trunks, and you can remove a switch identifier from a block of trunks that use the same switch identifier. The correct switch identifier for a trunk or block of trunks is determined by the type of switch to which the trunk is connected and whether or not that switch is a satellite switch located within 200 miles of the local system.
  • Page 307 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Facilities 3-105 Summary: Switch Identifiers Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity (100D Module) Factory Setting Null (no value)
  • Page 308 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Facilities 3-106 Procedure: Switch Identifiers Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Lines and Trunks menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber...
  • Page 309 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Facilities 3-107 Single-Trunk Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify a single trunk identifier. Select SwNum-Single. 2. Enter the number of the line/trunk. UDP SwitchNum-Single: Enter trunk number Backspace...
  • Page 310 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Facilities 3-108 Block Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify identifiers for a block of trunks. Select SwNum-Block. 2. Enter the starting trunk number in the range. UDP SwitchNum-Block: Enter starting trunk Backspace...

  • Page 311: Ds1 Facilities

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-109 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 7. Assign or remove the switch identifier. Select Enter or Delete. You may continue to assign or remove switch identifiers from additional lines/ trunks by repeating Steps 2 through 7.
  • Page 312 PRI tandem trunk that carries calls over long distances. PRI tandem trunks are preferable to T1 tandem trunks. Consult your Lucent Technologies representative for advice. If the type is T1 and the type of channel emulation is tie trunk, you must specify whether the lines/trunks are TIE-PBX, Toll, or Switched 56 Data service.
  • Page 313 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-111 NOTE: Touch-Tone Receivers are required on the far-end switch when the setting is Touch-Tone. Table 3-2 on page 3-114 shows the factory setting for each S56 Data Network Service option and the valid range for each threshold.
  • Page 314 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-112 To select T1: Ground-Start, Loop-Start, All Tie, or Unequip: Dial slot no. (1–17) LinesTrunks LS/GS/DS1 Select type of Enter Type Enter emulation Dial channel no.
  • Page 315 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-113 PC Procedure To select PRI: Type slot no. (1–17) To select T1: All Ground, All Loop, All Unequip: Type slot no. (1–17) Select type of emulation To select T1: Ground-Start, Loop-Start, All Tie, or Unequip:...
  • Page 316 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-114 Table 3-2. Switched 56 Data Signaling Options Option Factory Setting Range Direction Two-Way Two-Way, Outgoing, Incoming Intype Wink-Route by Wink-Route by Dial Plan, Dial Plant Delay-Route by Dial Plan Auto-Route by Line Appearance...
  • Page 317 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-115 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module (nn = 1 to 17). Loop/Ground/DS1: Enter slot number (1–17) Backspace...
  • Page 318 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-116 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 7. Save your entry. Select Enter. If you selected PRI, you have finished this procedure. Go to ‘‘Frame Format’’ on page 3-131.
  • Page 319 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-117 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information If you selected S56 Data, go to: S56 Data Procedure. If you selected ALL S56 Data, go to: All S56 Data Procedure.
  • Page 320 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-118 Tie-Trunk Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify the emulated trunks as TIE-PBX, Toll, or S56 Data. xx = slot entered in Step 3 Tie Type slot xx: Select one TIE-PBX...
  • Page 321 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-119 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 6. Save your entry. Select Enter. 7. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit four times. All Tie-Trunk Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1.
  • Page 322 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-120 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Assign or remove the channel. Select Enter or Delete. If you select Enter, continue with Step 3. If you select Delete, return to Step 1.
  • Page 323 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-121 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 2. Continue to assign direction to the next channel or go to Step 3. Select Next. Return to Step 1. The next channel is displayed on Line 1.
  • Page 324 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-122 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit four times. ‹ Answer Supervision Timing Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1.
  • Page 325 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-123 Disconnect Timing Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Erase the current disconnect time (nnnn). xx = number entered in Step 1 S56 Data Ch xx: Enter Disconnect time (140–4800)
  • Page 326 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-124 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 2. Continue to assign Dial Mode type to the next channel or go to Step 3. Select Next. Return to Step 13.
  • Page 327 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-125 Direction Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Select Direction. All S56 Data: Enter channel direction Two Way Outgoing Incoming Select Two Way, Next Outgoing, Exit...
  • Page 328 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-126 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 3. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit four times. ‹ Answer Supervision Timing Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1.

  • Page 329: Switched 56 Dial Plan Routing

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-127 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 3. Save your entry. Select Enter. 4. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit four times. ΠDial Mode Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information...
  • Page 330 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-128 Valid Entries D4, ESF Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure To specify Expected Digits: More LinesTrunks T1 Data NW S56 Dial Plan Routing Expected Digits Drop Dial expected digits...
  • Page 331 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-129 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu. Lines and Trunks: > Make a selection LS/GS/DS1 TIE Lines Copy...
  • Page 332 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-130 Expected Digits Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Erase the current number of expected digits (n). S56 Data Expected Digits: Enter number of expected digits (1–4) Backspace Exit...

  • Page 333: Frame Format

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-131 ‹ Delete Digits Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Erase the current number of digits to delete (n). S56 Data Delete Digits: Enter number of digits to delete (0–4) Backspace...
  • Page 334 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-132 Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure Dial slot no. (1–17) LinesTrunks LS/GS/DS1 Select format type Enter FrameFormat Enter Exit Exit PC Procedure Type slot no. (1–17) Select format type Procedure: Frame Format Console Display/Instructions...

  • Page 335: Zero Code Suppression

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-133 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Select FrameFormat. xx = slot number entered in Step 3 DS1 Slot xx: Make a selection Type Line Comp FrameFormat ChannelUnit...
  • Page 336 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-134 Summary: Zero Code Suppression Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition 100D module idle Planning Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity (100D module) Factory Setting AMI-ZCS Valid Entries...
  • Page 337 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-135 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module (nn = 1 to 17). Loop/Ground/DS1: Enter slot number (1–17) Backspace...

  • Page 338: Signaling Mode

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-136 Signaling Mode Use this procedure to specify the signaling for the 100D module as robbed-bit or common-channel signaling. NOTE: This procedure is needed only for T1 facilities; common-channel signaling is set automatically for PRI facilities.
  • Page 339 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-137 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1. Lines and Trunks: > Make a selection LS/GS/DS1 TIE Lines Copy TT/LS Disc RemoteAccss Pools Exit Toll Type 3.

  • Page 340: Line Compensation

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-138 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 7. Save your entry. Select Enter. 8. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit twice. Line Compensation Use this procedure to specify the amount of cable loss in decibels.
  • Page 341 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-139 Procedure: Line Compensation Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Lines and Trunks menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator...

  • Page 342: Channel Service Unit

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-140 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Select Line Compensation. xx = slot number entered in Step 3 DS1 Slot xx: Make a selection Type Line Comp FrameFormat...
  • Page 343 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-141 Summary: Channel Service Unit Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition 100D module idle Planning Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity (100D module) Factory Setting Foreign Exchange Valid Entries...
  • Page 344 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities 3-142 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 2. Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1. Lines and Trunks: > Make a selection LS/GS/DS1 TIE Lines Copy TT/LS Disc RemoteAccss Pools Exit Toll Type 3.

  • Page 345: Tie Trunks

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks 3-143 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 6. Select the type of channel unit. xx = slot number entered in Step 3 ChannelUnit DS1 Slot xx: Select one Foreign Exchange Special Access...
  • Page 346 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks 3-144 Summary: Direction Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Tie trunk idle Planning Form 3c, Incoming Trunks: Tie Factory Setting Two-way Valid Entries Two-way, Outgoing, Incoming Inspect Copy Option...
  • Page 347 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks 3-145 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Direction. TIE Trunks: Make a selection Direction Inmode Intype Outmode Outtype Dialtone E&M Signal AnsSupvr Exit Disconnect 4.

  • Page 348: Tie Trunk Seizure Type

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks 3-146 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 8. Save your entry. Select Enter. 9. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit twice. Tie Trunk Seizure Type Use this procedure to specify whether the seizure type of incoming or outgoing tie trunk is wink, delay, immediate, or automatic.
  • Page 349 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks 3-147 Valid Entries Wink, Delay, Immediate, Automatic Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure Intype or Outtype LinesTrunks TIE Lines Dial trunk no. Specify seizure Enter type (Wink, Delay, Immediate, or Automatic) Enter...
  • Page 350 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks 3-148 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Enter the tie trunk number. = option name selected in Step 3 **** Trunk Type: **** Enter trunk for assignmt Ã...

  • Page 351: E&M Signal

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks 3-149 E&M Signal Use this procedure to specify the type of tie trunk signal, as follows: E&M Mode: — 1S, Type 1 Standard. Tie trunks that are connected through the local telephone company.
  • Page 352 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks 3-150 Procedure: E&M Signal Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Lines and Trunks menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator...

  • Page 353: Dial Mode

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks 3-151 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Select Enter. 6. Specify the type of signaling for the trunk. xxx = trunk entered in Step 4 Trunk xxx: Select E&M Trk Signaling Type1S...
  • Page 354 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks 3-152 Summary: Dial Mode Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 3c, Incoming Trunks: Tie Factory Setting Rotary Valid Entries Rotary, Touch-tone Inspect Copy Option...
  • Page 355 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks 3-153 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Select TIE Lines. Lines and Trunks: > Make a selection LS/GS/DS1 TIE Lines Copy TT/LS Disc RemoteAccss Pools Exit Toll Type...
  • Page 356 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks 3-154 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 2. Enter the number of the line/trunk. = option name selected in Step 3 **** Trunk dial: **** Enter Trunks w/TouchTone Delete Backspace...

  • Page 357: Tie Trunk Dial Tone

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks 3-155 Tie Trunk Dial Tone Use this procedure to specify whether the system provides dial tone for people calling in on a tie trunk. The settings are remote (system provides dial tone) and local (system does not provide dial tone).
  • Page 358 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks 3-156 Procedure: Tie Trunk Dial Tone Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Lines and Trunks menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber...
  • Page 359 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks 3-157 Single-Line Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify entry mode. Select Entry Mode. 2. Enter the number of the trunk (nnn). OutTrunk Dial : Enter Trunks w/TouchTone Delete Backspace...

  • Page 360: Tie Trunk Answer Supervision Time

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks 3-158 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Specify remote or local dial signaling for each block. Toggle the green LED on or off as required: On = remote dial tone Off = local dial tone 3.
  • Page 361 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks 3-159 Procedure: Tie Trunk Answer Supervision Time Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Lines and Trunks menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber...
  • Page 362 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks 3-160 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Select Enter. 6. Erase the current number of milliseconds (nnnn). xxxx = trunk entered in Step 4 Trunk xxxx: Enter AnsSupervisionTime (20–4800, increment 20)

  • Page 363: Disconnect Time

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks 3-161 Disconnect Time Use this procedure to specify the tie trunk disconnect time limit in milliseconds. Summary: Disconnect Time Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required...
  • Page 364 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks 3-162 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 2. Select TIE Lines. Lines and Trunks: > Make a selection LS/GS/DS1 TIE Lines Copy TT/LS Disc RemoteAccss Pools Exit Toll Type...
  • Page 365 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks 3-163 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 7. Enter the disconnect time (nnnn = 140 to 2,400 ms). xxxx = trunk entered in Step 4 Trunk xxxx: Enter Disconnect Time (140–2400)

  • Page 366: Did Trunks

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DID Trunks 3-164 DID Trunks 3Programming Procedures This section covers programming DID trunks and includes procedures for the following: Block Assignment DID Trunk Type Disconnect Time Expected Digits Delete Digits Add Digits...
  • Page 367 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DID Trunks 3-165 Console Procedure To program a single-line/trunk: Dial trunk block no. LinesTrunks Block (1 or 2) Type the line/trunk Enter Entry Mode Enter or Delete Exit Exit Exit...
  • Page 368 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DID Trunks 3-166 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Block Assignment. Direct Inward Dial: Make a selection Block DeleteDigit Type Add Digits Disconnect Signaling ExpectDigit InvalDstn Exit 4.
  • Page 369 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DID Trunks 3-167 Single-Line Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify entry mode. Select Entry Mode. 2. Enter the trunk number. Block x: x = block entered in Step 4 Enter line/trunk number Delete Backspace...

  • Page 370: Did Trunk Type

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DID Trunks 3-168 Block Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify the DID trunks associated with 20 buttons on the system programming console. Select: Lines 01–20 Lines 21–40 Lines 41–60 Lines 61-80...
  • Page 371 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DID Trunks 3-169 PC Procedure Type trunk block no. Procedure: DID Trunk Type Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Lines and Trunks menu. System Programming: >...

  • Page 372: Disconnect Time

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DID Trunks 3-170 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Select Enter. 6. Specify immediate-start or wink-start. x = block number entered in Step 4 DID Block x: Select type Immed...
  • Page 373 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DID Trunks 3-171 Console Procedure Disconnect Dial trunk no. LinesTrunks Drop Dial no. of ms (10 2,400) Enter – Enter Exit Exit PC Procedure Type trunk no. Type no.
  • Page 374 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DID Trunks 3-172 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 4. Enter the DID trunk. DID Disconnect Time: Enter the trunk number à Dial or type: Trunk number [nnn] Backspace Slot and port number *[sspp] Exit...

  • Page 375: Expected Digits

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DID Trunks 3-173 Expected Digits Use this procedure to tell the system how many digits are sent by the local telephone company. NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems, if the dialed digits received on a DID trunk correspond to a non-local extension number, the call is routed to that extension.
  • Page 376 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DID Trunks 3-174 Procedure: Expected Digits Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Lines and Trunks menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator...

  • Page 377: Delete Digits

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DID Trunks 3-175 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Select Enter. 6. Erase the current number of expected digits (n). x = block entered in Step 4 DID Block x: Enter number of expected digits (1–4)
  • Page 378 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DID Trunks 3-176 Factory Setting 0 digits Valid Entries 0 to 4 digits Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure Dial trunk LinesTrunks DeleteDigit block no. (1 or 2) Drop Dial no.
  • Page 379 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DID Trunks 3-177 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 4. Enter the trunk block (n = 1 or 2). DID Delete Digits: Enter block number (1–2) Backspace Ã...

  • Page 380: Add Digits

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DID Trunks 3-178 Add Digits Use this procedure to specify the number of leading digits that must be added to the digits sent by the local telephone company. Use this procedure when the number of digits sent by the telephone company is fewer than the number in the system numbering plan.
  • Page 381 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DID Trunks 3-179 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 2. Select DID. Lines and Trunks: > Make a selection LS/GS/DS1 TIE Lines Copy TT/LS Disc RemoteAccss Pools Exit Toll Type 3.

  • Page 382: Signaling

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DID Trunks 3-180 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 7. Enter the number of digits to add (n = 1 to 9999). Ã Dial or type [n]. 8.
  • Page 383 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DID Trunks 3-181 PC Procedure Type trunk block no. Procedure: Signaling Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Lines and Trunks menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions...

  • Page 384: Invalid Destination

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DID Trunks 3-182 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Select Enter. 6. Specify Rotary or Touch Tone. x = block entered in Step 4 DID Block x: Select one Rotary...
  • Page 385 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures DID Trunks 3-183 Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure LinesTrunks InvalDstn Send to Backup Extension or Return Fast Busy Enter Exit Exit PC Procedure Procedure: Invalid Destination Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1.

  • Page 386: Pri Facilities

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-184 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Specify how to handle calls directed to an invalid destination. Invalid Destination DID: Select one Send to Backup Extension Return Fast Busy Select Send to Backup Extension Exit...

  • Page 387: Switch Type

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-185 Network Selection Tables Special Services Tables Call-by-Call Service Table NOTES: If you are adding PRI facilities to an existing system, certain values must be set correctly.
  • Page 388 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-186 In Release 6.0 and later systems, two additional switch types allow you to specify additional switch options in order to set up a PRI tandem trunk that connects two MERLIN LEGEND Communications Systems or a MERLIN LEGEND Communications System and a DEFINITY Communications System.
  • Page 389 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-187 Valid Entries Not applicable Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure Dial slot no. LinesTrunks SwitchType (1–17) Specify switch type Enter Enter Exit Exit PC Procedure Type slot no.

  • Page 390: Telephone Number

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-188 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Enter the slot number in the control unit (ss = 1 to 17). PRI Slot Number: Enter slot number (1–17): Ã...
  • Page 391 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-189 Summary: Telephone Number Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX, Key Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity (100D module) Factory Setting No digits Valid Entries...
  • Page 392 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-190 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Telephone Number. PRI Lines: Make a selection Telephone Protocol Number B-ChannlGrp DialPlanRtg NumbrToSend OutgoingTbl Test TelNum SwitchType Exit 4.

  • Page 393: B-Channel Groups

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-191 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 9. Save your entry. Select Enter. 10. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit twice. B-Channel Groups Use this procedure to perform the following: Assign B-channels to a group.
  • Page 394 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-192 B-channels must be identified by control unit slot and port numbers since they are not associated with a line/trunk number or a logical ID. PRI B-channel groups programmed for line routing perform similarly to loop-start trunks.
  • Page 395 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-193 PC Procedure To program a single-line/trunk: Type group no Type B-channel slot and port nos. Type group Type line/trunk no. To program a block of lines/trunks: Type group no.
  • Page 396 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-194 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Select B Channels. B-Channel Groups: Make a selection B Channels IncomingRtg Lines NetworkServ Copy Number Exit 5. Enter the B-channel group number (nn = 1 to 80). B-Channel Groups: Enter group number Backspace...
  • Page 397 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-195 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 9. Continue to assign B-channels to another group or go to Step 10. Select Next. Return to Step 7. The next group is displayed on Line 1.
  • Page 398 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-196 Single-Line Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify entry mode. Select Entry Mode. 2. Enter a line number. B-Channel Group xx: xx = number entered in Step 12 Enter line number Delete Backspace...

  • Page 399: Network Service

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-197 Block Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify the block of 20 lines associated with 20 buttons on the system programming console. Select: Lines 01–20 Lines 21–40...
  • Page 400 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-198 Summary: Network Service Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX, Key Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity (100D module) Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries...
  • Page 401 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-199 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Select PRI. Lines and Trunks: > Make a selection LS/GS/DS1 TIE Lines Copy TT/LS Disc RemoteAccss Pools Exit Toll Type 3.
  • Page 402 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-200 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 7. Specify a network service. If you select , go to: Network Services: AT&T Toll Make a selection AT&T Toll Procedure.
  • Page 403 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-201 5ESS Local Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify a 5ESS local service. xx = number entered in Step 5 B-Channel Group xx: Select One OUTWATS 56/64 Digtl...
  • Page 404 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-202 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit four times. Miscellaneous Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify a service. B-Channel Group xx: xx = number entered in Step 5 Select one...
  • Page 405 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-203 DMS-100 Local Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify a DMS-100 local service. xx = number entered in Step 5 B-Channel Group xx: Select One DMS-Private DMS-TieTrk...

  • Page 406: Copy Telephone Number To Send

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-204 Copy Telephone Number to Send Use this procedure to indicate whether or not the telephone number to send to the network (for calls going out over ISDN lines assigned to a B-channel group) is copied from the number assigned to that channel.
  • Page 407 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-205 Procedure: Copy Telephone Number to Send Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Lines and Trunks menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber...
  • Page 408 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-206 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Enter the B-channel group number (nn = 1 to 80). B-Channel Groups: Enter group number Backspace à Exit Enter Dial or type [nn].

  • Page 409: Incoming Routing

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-207 Incoming Routing Use this procedure to specify whether incoming routing is either by line appearance or according to dial plan. Dial Plan Routing is available in Hybrid/PBX mode only.
  • Page 410 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-208 Procedure: Incoming Routing Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Lines and Trunks menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator...
  • Page 411 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-209 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Enter the B-channel group number (nn = 1 to 80). PRI Incoming Routing: Enter group number Backspace Ã...

  • Page 412: Telephone Number To Send

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-210 Telephone Number to Send Use this procedure to assign the telephone number to send to the network when outgoing calls are made on an ISDN line. If the person being called subscribes to an automatic number identification service, the number indicates who is calling.
  • Page 413 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-211 PC Procedure Specify type of no. Type base no. Type telephone no. (up to 12 digits; 0–9) Procedure: Telephone Number to Send Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1.
  • Page 414 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-212 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Specify the type of number to send. If you select Extension Only, Telephone Number to Send: Make a selection (entire system) continue with Step 5.
  • Page 415 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-213 Line Telephone Number Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the line number (nnn). Telephone Number to Send: Enter line number Backspace Ã...

  • Page 416: Test Telephone Number

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-214 Test Telephone Number Use this procedure to assign a test line or trunk telephone number for each 100D module installed in the control unit. The number assigned to the test line/trunk must be different from the numbers assigned to other channels in the same B-channel group.
  • Page 417 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-215 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Select PRI. Lines and Trunks: > Make a selection LS/GS/DS1 TIE Lines Copy TT/LS Disc RemoteAccss Pools Exit Toll Type 3.

  • Page 418: Timers And Counters

    The factory settings for these thresholds are standard and rarely need to be changed. If you are not sure of the correct timer and threshold settings for your PRI lines and trunks, check with your Lucent Technologies representative before you make a change. Incorrect settings can cause your PRI lines and trunks to malfunction.
  • Page 419 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-217 K Counter. Counts the number of layer three unacknowledged messages sent from the system to the network on a D-channel. T303 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the system sends a setup message to initiate an outgoing call.
  • Page 420 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-218 PC Procedure Type slot no. (1–17) Select timer/counter Type no. of ms/octets/and so on Table 3-3. Timers and Counters Timer/Counter Purpose Factory Setting Valid Range T200 Timer Maximum response time...
  • Page 421 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-219 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Select PRI. Lines and Trunks: > Make a selection LS/GS/DS1 TIE Lines Copy TT/LS Disc RemoteAccss Pools Exit Toll Type 3.
  • Page 422 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-220 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 7. Select the timer/counter to change. xx = number entered in Step 5 Slot xx PRI Settings: > Make a selection To select other timers, press More to go T200 Timer...

  • Page 423: Terminal Equipment Identifier

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-221 Terminal Equipment Identifier Use this procedure to assign the link layer address of a piece of equipment connected to each D-channel. Normally, only one piece is connected and the system assumes that the Terminal Equipment Identifier (TEI) is 0.
  • Page 424 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-222 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Select PRI. Lines and Trunks: > Make a selection LS/GS/DS1 TIE Lines Copy TT/LS Disc RemoteAccss Pools Exit Toll Type 3.

  • Page 425: Dial Plan Routing

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-223 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 7. Erase the current identification number (nn). xx = number entered in Step 5 Slot xx TEI: Enter terminal equipment id number (0–63) Backspace Next...
  • Page 426 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-224 In Release 4.2 and later, you can specify the following additional services: MCI Toll Services available for a DMS-250 or DEX600E switch type: —...
  • Page 427 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-225 Valid Entries Service: Toll, Local, Miscellaneous Entries: 0–15 Digits per Pattern: 0–8 Total Digits: 1–14 Delete Digits: 0–14, 0=wildcard Add Digits: 0–4 (valid digits: 0–9) Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure...
  • Page 428 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-226 To specify Total Digits: Type entry no. Type digits (1–14) To specify Delete Digits: Type entry no. Type delete digits (0–14; 0=wildcard) To specify Add Digits: Type entry no.
  • Page 429 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-227 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Dial Plan Routing. PRI Lines: Make a selection PhoneNumber Protocol B-ChannlGrp DialPlanRtg NumbrToSend OutgoingTbl Test TelNum SwitchType Exit 4.
  • Page 430 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-228 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 7. Select a service. If you select AT&T Toll, go to: DialPlanRouting Service: Make a selection AT&T Toll Procedure. AT&T Toll DMS-100Local If you select 5ESS Local, go to:...
  • Page 431 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-229 Local Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select a service for the B-channel group. xx = number entered in Step 5 Dial Plan Rtg Entry xx: Select One INWATS 56/64 Digtl...
  • Page 432 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-230 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Continue to assign the service to another routing entry or go to Step 3. Select Next. Return to Step 1. The next dial plan routing entry is displayed on Line 1.
  • Page 433 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-231 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Erase the current network service (nnnnn). xx = number entered in Step 5 Dial Plan Rtg Entry xx: Enter Network Service (5 digit code of 0,1) nnnnn...
  • Page 434 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-232 DMS-100 Local Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select a miscellaneous service. xx = number entered in Step 5 Dial Plan Rtg Entry xx: Select one DMS-Private DMS-TieTrk...
  • Page 435 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-233 ‹ Patterns Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the entry number (nn = 0 to 15). Leave field blank to match any pattern. DialPlanRoutingPatterns: Enter entry no.
  • Page 436 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-234 Total Digits Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the entry number (nn = 0 to 15). Use 0 to match any number of digits. DialPlanRtg TotalDigits: Enter entry no.
  • Page 437 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-235 Delete Digits Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the entry number (nn = 0 to 15). DialPlanRtg DeleteDigits: Enter entry no. (0–15) Backspace Ã...
  • Page 438 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-236 Add Digits Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the entry number (nn = 0 to 15). DialPlanRtg AddDigits: Enter entry no. (0–15) Backspace Ã...

  • Page 439: Outgoing Tables

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-237 Outgoing Tables PRI provides tables that work in conjunction with personal lines, pools, and ARS tables to route calls. The following tables specify services for outgoing calls: Call-by-Call.
  • Page 440 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-238 NOTES: U.S. customers rarely need to program additional Network Selection tables because long-distance carrier codes match 10*** or 101****. In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), when routing private network trunks for ARS 10*** and 101**** (Interexchange or IXC) calls from a networked switch that is not connected to the public switched network and only has private trunks, the private network trunks...
  • Page 441 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-239 Procedure: Network Selection Tables Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Lines and Trunks menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options...
  • Page 442 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-240 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Enter the table number (n = 0 to 3). Network Selection Table: Enter entry number (0–3) Backspace Ã...

  • Page 443: Special Services Tables

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-241 Special Services Tables Eight tables provide for international calling and for operator-assisted calls. Default tables include the special prefixes 0 and 00 for operator-assisted calls. Dialed numbers are matched against entries in these tables for patterns (011, 010, 01, 00, 0, and 1);...
  • Page 444 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-242 PC Procedure To specify Pattern: Type entry Type pattern To specify Operator: Type entry no Select type of operator To specify Type of Number: Type entry Type number type To specify Delete Digits:...
  • Page 445 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-243 Operator Tables LinesTrunks AuxEquip Exit NightSrvce...
  • Page 446 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-244 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Select PRI. Lines and Trunks: > Make a selection LS/GS/DS1 TIE Lines Copy TT/LS Disc RemoteAccss Pools Exit Toll Type 3.
  • Page 447 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-245 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Select an option. If you select Pattern, go to: Special Services Table: Make a selection Pattern Procedure. Pattern If you select Operator, go to: Operator...
  • Page 448 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-246 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Enter the pattern to be matched. Ã Dial or type [nnnn]. 5. Continue to assign the pattern to another table or go to Step 6. Select Next.
  • Page 449 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-247 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Continue to assign the operator type to another table or go to Step 5. Select Next. Return to Step 3. The next table is displayed on Line 1.
  • Page 450 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-248 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Select Enter. 6. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit four times. Delete Digits Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1.

  • Page 451: Call-By-Call Service Table

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-249 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 6. Save your entry. Select Enter. 7. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit four times. Call-by-Call Service Table When a call is placed on a Call-by-Call B-channel group, a specific service is selected.
  • Page 452 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-250 Summary: Call-by-Call Service Table Programmable by System Manager Mode Key and Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity (100D module) Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries...
  • Page 453 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-251 To specify Voice/Data: Type list no. (0–9) Select voice, data, or both To specify Network Service: Type list no. (0–9) Select service (AT&T Toll, 5ESS Local, MCI Toll, Miscellaneous, or DMS-100 Local) To specify Delete Digits: Dial list no.
  • Page 454 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-252 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Outgoing Tables. PRI Lines: Make a selection PhoneNumber Protocol B-ChannlGrp DialPlanRtg NumbrToSend OutgoingTbl Test TelNum SwitchType Exit 4.
  • Page 455 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-253 Patterns Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the list (l = 0 to 9) and the table entry (e = 0 to 9) numbers. CBC Services - Patterns: Enter list (0–9) and entry (0–9)
  • Page 456 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-254 Voice/Data Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the list number (n = 0 to 9). CBC Services Voice/Data: Enter list number (0–9) Backspace Ã...
  • Page 457 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-255 Network Service Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the list number (n = 0 to 9). CBC Network Service: Enter list number (0–9) Backspace Ã...
  • Page 458 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-256 AT&T Toll Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify an AT&T Toll service. x = number entered in Step 1 of the CBC Services List x: Network Service Procedure.
  • Page 459 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-257 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Save your entry. Select Enter. 4. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit four times. MCI Toll Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1.
  • Page 460 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-258 Miscellaneous Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify a service. x = number entered in Step 1 of the CBC Service List x: Network Service Procedure.
  • Page 461 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-259 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 6. Continue to assign the code to another service list or return to Step 7. Select Next. Return to Step 4. The next CBC services list is displayed on Line 1.
  • Page 462 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities 3-260 Delete Digits Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the list number (n = 0 to 9). CBC Serv--Delete Digits: Enter list number (0–9) Backspace Ã...

  • Page 463: Bri Facilities

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities 3-261 BRI Facilities The procedures in this section provide the steps for programming the following options for Basic Rate Interface (BRI) facilities connected to an 800 NI-BRI module: Service Profile Identifier (SPID) and Directory Number (DN) Timers...
  • Page 464 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities 3-262 Console Procedure More Dial LinesTrunks SPID/DN. line/trunk no. (1–80) Dial SPID Enter Dial DN Enter Enter Exit Exit PC Procedure Type line/trunk no. (1–80) Type SPID Type DN...
  • Page 465 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities 3-263 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Select Service Profile Identifier and Directory Number. BRI Lines: Make a selection SPID/DN Timers Exit 5. Enter the line/trunk number (nnn = 1 to 80). SPID/DN: Enter line number Backspace...

  • Page 466: Timers

    The factory settings for these thresholds are standard and rarely need to be changed. If you are not sure of the correct timer and threshold settings for your BRI lines and trunks, check with your Lucent Technologies representative before you make a change. Incorrect settings can cause your BRI lines and trunks to malfunction.
  • Page 467 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities 3-265 T305 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the communications system sends a disconnect message to clear a call. T308 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the communications system sends a release message to clear a call.
  • Page 468 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities 3-266 PC Procedure Select timer Type no. of seconds or ms Procedure: Timers Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Lines and Trunks menu. System Programming: >...
  • Page 469 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities 3-267 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Select the timer to change. BRI Timer Settings: > Make a selection T200 Timer T308 Timer T203 Timer T303 Timer T305 Timer Exit...

  • Page 470: Extensions

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-268 Extensions 3Programming Procedures This section contains the following procedures: Assigning outside lines or trunks to the buttons on a telephone (including lines and trunks used for loudspeaker paging). Copying line button assignments from one extension to either an individual extension or a block of extensions.
  • Page 471 (such as the American Society of Composers, Artists, and Producers or Broadcast Music Incorporated). Magic On Hold requires no such license and can be purchased from Lucent Technologies. Pool buttons cannot be assigned to or removed from extensions unless the pool has trunks assigned.
  • Page 472 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-270 assigned, remove the lines used as placeholders on the buttons reserved for features. Summary: Assign Trunks or Pools to Extensions Programmable by System Manager Mode All, but note differences in factory settings.
  • Page 473 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-271 Valid Entries Extension numbers Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk: Dial ext. no. Extensions Lines/Trunks Dial line/trunk no. Enter Entry Mode Enter Exit...
  • Page 474 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-272 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 2. Select LinesTrunks. Extensions: > Make a selection LinesTrunks Restrct Copy Line Copy Account Dial Outcd BIS/HFAI Restriction Call Pickup Exit VoiceSignl 3.
  • Page 475 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-273 l Single-Line/Trunk Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify entry mode. Select Entry Mode. 2. Enter the line or trunk number. Extension xxxx : xxxx = extension number entered Enter line/trunk numbers in Step 3...

  • Page 476: Copy Line/Trunk Assignments

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-274 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 2. Assign or remove the line/trunk to or from the line button. Toggle the green LEDs next to each line button on or off as required.
  • Page 477 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-275 not affected. The system does not provide an error tone to signal that the copy did not work for all of the extensions in the block. Summary: Copy Line/Trunk Assignments Programmable by System Manager...
  • Page 478 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-276 Procedure: Copy Line and Trunk Assignments Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Select the Extensions menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator...
  • Page 479 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-277 Single Extension Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify the extension you want to copy from. Copy Lines: Enter extension to copy from Backspace Ã...
  • Page 480 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-278 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 5. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit two times. Block Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify the extension you want to copy from. Copy Lines: Enter extension to copy from...

  • Page 481: Assign Intercom Or System Access Buttons

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-279 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 6. Save your entry. Select Enter. 7. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit twice. Assign Intercom or System Access Buttons Use this procedure to assign or change the assignments for Intercom (ICOM) buttons used to make and receive inside calls.
  • Page 482 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-280 NOTE: When single-line sets are programmed with only one SA or ICOM button, the Transfer, Conference and Drop features are disabled. Other features that require a second dial tone, such as Account Code/Number Entry, After Call Work States, Call Pickup, Call Waiting, and Privacy, are also affected.
  • Page 483 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-281 Factory Setting Key Mode. An Intercom Ring (ICOM Ring) button, an Intercom Voice (ICOM Voice) button, and the first eight lines connected to the system are assigned to all analog multiline and MLX telephones, excluding operator positions.
  • Page 484 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-282 Copy Option Yes. (You can copy additional SA buttons to another extension, but you cannot overwrite SA buttons that are already assigned.) Console Procedure To program an extension: More Dial ext.
  • Page 485 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-283 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 3. Select an extension option. Select Program Ext and go to: Centralized Programming: Make a selection Program Extensions Procedure. Program Ext Select Copy Ext and go to: Copy Ext...
  • Page 486 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-284 Table 3-6. Programming Codes for Assigning Buttons To... On the console... On the PC... Assign SA or ICOM Ring Dial *16 Type *16 button Dial *16 , press button Type *16 , press V +...
  • Page 487 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-285 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 2. Save your entry. Select Enter. 3. Select Start. xx = extension entered in Step 1 Extension Program Press HOME to exit Sys Program Start 4.
  • Page 488 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-286 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 7. Assign a voice or ring attribute. To assign the voice attribute to the Ring button, select the same button and enter the programming code for voice (see Table 3-6 on page...

  • Page 489: Analog Multiline Telephone Without Built-In Speakerphone (Bis) Or Hands-Free Answer On Intercom (Hfai) Capability

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-287 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Enter the extension to copy to. xxxx = extension entered in Step 1 Copy Extension xxxx to: Enter extension Backspace Next Ã...
  • Page 490 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-288 (SP-34), 34-button with speakerphone and display (SP-34D), BIS-10, BIS-22, BIS-34, BIS-22D, and BIS-34D. This procedure is not necessary for MLX or single-line telephones. Summary: Analog Multiline Telephones without BIS or HFAI Capability Programmable by...

  • Page 491: Analog Multiline Telephones With Voice Announce Feature

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-289 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Select BIS/HFAI. Extensions: > Make a selection LinesTrunks RestrctCopy Line Copy Account Dial Outcd BIS/HFAI Restriction Call Pickup Exit VoiceSignl 3.
  • Page 492 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-290 feature when the telephone is busy or off-hook. Calls cannot be placed to the extension jack reserved for the Voice Announce feature when the telephone is busy.
  • Page 493 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-291 Procedure: Analog Multiline Telephones with Voice Announce Feature Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Extensions menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber...

  • Page 494: Rotary Signaling On Tip/Ring Ports

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-292 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 4. Specify whether or not the extension is paired for the Voice Announce feature. Select Enter or Delete. You may continue to assign or remove the Voice Announce feature to additional extensions by repeating Steps 3 and 4.
  • Page 495 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-293 Procedure: Rotary Signaling on Tip/Ring Ports Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Extensions menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator...

  • Page 496: Tip/Ring Functionality On 412 Ls-Id Etr And 016 Etr Modules

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-294 Tip/Ring Functionality on 412 LS-ID ETR and 016 ETR Modules Use this procedure to assign either T/R or ETR functionality to ports on the 412 LS-ID-ETR or 016 ETR modules.
  • Page 497 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-295 Summary: Tip/Ring Functionality on 412 LS-ID-ETR and 016 ETR Modules Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition System idle Planning Form Factory Setting Valid Entries Tip/ring port Inspect...
  • Page 498 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Extensions 3-296 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. Extensions: > Make a selection Ext Status ARS Restart Group Page Mis Disable Group Cover...

  • Page 499: Auxiliary Equipment

    [such as the American Society of Composers, Artists, and Producers (ASCAP) or Broadcast Music Incorporated (BMI)]. Magic On Hold requires no such license and can be purchased from your Lucent Technologies dealer. Only one Music-On-Hold line/trunk jack is allowed per system.
  • Page 500 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment 3-298 Summary: Music-On-Hold Programmable by System Manager Mode All, but in Hybrid/PBX mode the line/trunk designated for Music-On-Hold cannot be assigned to a line/trunk pool.
  • Page 501 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment 3-299 Procedure: Music-On-Hold Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Auxiliary Equipment menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables LinesTrunks...

  • Page 502: Loudspeaker Paging

    (such as ASCAP or BMI). Magic On Hold requires no such license and can be purchased from your Lucent Technologies dealer. A maximum of three single-zone or multizone loudspeaker paging systems can be connected to the system.
  • Page 503 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment 3-301 Procedure: Loudspeaker Paging Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Auxiliary Equipment menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables...

  • Page 504: Fax Machines

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment 3-302 Fax Machines Use this procedure to add a fax machine by assigning the extension jack used to connect the fax machine. To remove a fax machine and free the extension jack for another use, you must remove the extension jack assignment.
  • Page 505 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment 3-303 Console Procedure To program an extension for a fax machine: Dial ext. no. AuxEquip Extension Enter Exit To have a message waiting light for a fax machine: Dial ext.
  • Page 506 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment 3-304 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Extension. Fax: Make a selection Extension Msg Waiting Threshold Exit 4. Specify the extension to be used for the fax machine. Fax Extension: If no DSS is attached: Ã...
  • Page 507 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment 3-305 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 8. Enter the extension for the fax machine that is to send the message-waiting indication. Fax Msg. Waiting Enter the fax extension number Backspace...

  • Page 508: Maintenance Alarms

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment 3-306 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 14. Erase the current number of seconds (nn = 0 30). – FAX Threshold Duration: Enter duration (0–30sec) Backspace Exit Enter...
  • Page 509 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment 3-307 Copy Option Console Procedure Dial line/trunk no. AuxEquip MaintAlarms Enter Exit Exit PC Procedure Type line/trunk no. Procedure: Maintenance Alarms Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1.

  • Page 510: Voice Messaging System And Automated Attendant

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment 3-308 Voice Messaging System and Automated Attendant Use this procedure to specify the touch-tone duration and the interval between digits in codes sent between a voice messaging system and the communications system.

  • Page 511: Automated Attendant

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment 3-309 Copy Option Console Procedure Drop Dial AuxEquip VMS/AA TransferRtn no. of rings (0 Drop Enter TT Duration – Dial no. of ms (50 200 ms, in increments of 25 ms) –...
  • Page 512 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment 3-310 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Transfer Return. If you do not want to change the current VMS/AA: Make a selection setting for number of rings before transfer, TransferRtn go to Step 7.
  • Page 513 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment 3-311 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 8. Erase the current touch-tone duration setting (xxx). Touch-Tone Duration: Enter duration length (50–200 ms, increment 25) Backspace Exit Enter Press Drop.

  • Page 514: Computer Telephony Integration (Cti) Link

    CTI applications to interact with the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System over a local area network (LAN). The CTI link is the system’s hardware and software interface to the Lucent Technologies ® PassageWay Telephony Services product, which supports the Windows ®...
  • Page 515 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Link 3-313 NOTES: You should choose a module other than the one that has the system programming port so that you can still perform maintenance and system programming when the board with the CTI link extension is busied-out.

  • Page 516: Summary: Cti Link

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Link 3-314 Summary: CTI Link Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 2b, System Numbering: Digital Adjuncts Factory Setting No port programmed as CTI link Valid Entries...
  • Page 517 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Link 3-315 Procedure: CTI Link Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Auxiliary Equipment menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber...

  • Page 518: Cti Link Programming Errors

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Link 3-316 CTI Link Programming Errors During the programming of the CTI link, entering an inappropriate extension number can give you an error message. This section contains displays of each screen and information about what to do if the screen appears.
  • Page 519 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Link 3-317 Extension Selected Is System Programming Port CTI Link Extensions: Extension xxxx Failed. Extension Selected is System Programming Port. Exit This message appears if you have chosen an extension that has been programmed as a system programming port, which is not permitted as the CTI link port.
  • Page 520 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Link 3-318 Port Reserved for Operator Positions CTI Link Extensions: Extension xxxx Failed. This Port is Reserved For Operator Positions. Exit This message appears when the port that you are programming as the CTI link is on the Operator Position list (as a QCC or DLC).

  • Page 521: Optional Extension Features

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-319 Optional Extension Features The summaries in this section detail the steps in programming the following optional features: Extension Language Pool Dial-Out Code Calling Restrictions Copy Calling Restrictions ARS Restriction Level for Extensions...
  • Page 522 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-320 Factory Setting English Valid Entries English, French, Spanish Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure To program a single extension: More Dial Language Extensions Single ext.
  • Page 523 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-321 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Select Language. System Programming: Make a selection Labeling Language Data Print Cntr-Prg Exit 3. Select Extensions. Language: Make a selection SystemLang...
  • Page 524 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-322 Single-Extension Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the extension number. If no DSS is attached: Extension Language: Ã SP: “Entering an Extension” Enter extension number If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or...
  • Page 525 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-323 Block Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the starting extension number. Extension Language: Enter starting extension Backspace à Exit Enter SP: “Entering an Extension”...

  • Page 526: Pool Dial-Out Code

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-324 Pool Dial-Out Code Use this procedure to allow or restrict dialing pool dial-out codes and placing calls on specific line/trunk pools. Beginning with Release 3.1, the factory settings restrict all extensions from dialing any line/trunk pool dial-out code.
  • Page 527 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-325 Console Procedure Dial ext. no. Extensions Dial OutCd Dial pool dial-out code Enter Enter Exit Exit PC Procedure Type ext. no. Type pool dial-out code Procedure: Pool Dial-Out Code...
  • Page 528 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-326 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 4. Save your entry. Select Enter. If you get the Station Busy message, wait for an idle condition or exit system programming and try again later.

  • Page 529: Calling Restrictions

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-327 Calling Restrictions Use this procedure to change individual extension calling restrictions to one of the following: Unrestricted Restricted from making all outgoing calls Restricted from making toll calls SECURITY ALERT: Toll fraud can occur if extensions are not properly restricted.
  • Page 530 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-328 Copy Option Console Procedure Dial ext. no. Extensions Restriction Select restriction (Unrestricted, Outward Enter restricted, or Toll restricted) Enter Exit PC Procedure Type ext.

  • Page 531: Copy Calling Restrictions

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-329 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 4. Save your entry. Select Enter. If you get the Station Busy message, wait for an idle condition or exit system programming and try again later.
  • Page 532 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-330 busy extension becomes idle. The number of the busy extension is not shown. If a DSS is attached, the LED associated with the busy extension is on. If you exit instead of waiting for the busy extension to become idle, copying for the rest of the extensions in the block is canceled;...
  • Page 533 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-331 To copy to a block of extensions: Dial copy Extensions RestrctCopy Block from ext. no. Dial first no. in copy to Enter block Dial last no.
  • Page 534 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-332 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 3. Specify whether to copy calling restrictions to an individual extension or to a block of extensions. Copy Restrictions: Make a selection If you select Single, go to:...
  • Page 535 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-333 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 4. Continue to copy calling restrictions from another extension to an individual extension or go to Step 3. Select Next.

  • Page 536: Ars Restriction Level For Extensions

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-334 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 5. Enter the logical ID of the last extension in the block (nnn = 1 to 144). xxxx = extension entered in Step 1 Start at extension xxxx: Enter ending extension...
  • Page 537 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-335 Planning Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone 4d, MLX Telephone 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC 6g, Call Restriction Assignments and Lists...
  • Page 538 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-336 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select ARS Restrict. Extensions: > Make a selection Ext Status ARS Restrct Group Page Mic Disable Group Cover Remote Frwd Grp Calling...

  • Page 539: Forced Account Code Entry

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-337 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 7. Enter the restriction level (n = 0 to 6). xxxx = extension entered in Step 4 Extension xxxx: Enter ARS restrict level (0–6)
  • Page 540 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-338 Data Form 1a, Modem Data Workstation Data Form 1b, ISDN Terminal Adapter Data Workstation Factory Setting Not assigned Valid Entries Assigned, not assigned Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure...

  • Page 541: Microphone Operation

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-339 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Specify the extension. If no DSS is attached: Forced Account Code: Ã Enter extensions SP: “Entering an Extension” If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or Backspace...
  • Page 542 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-340 Planning Form 4d, MLX Telephone 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital Factory Setting Enabled Valid Entries Enabled, Disabled Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure More Toggle LED Extensions...

  • Page 543: Authorization Codes

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-341 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Microphone Disable. Extensions: > Make a selection Ext Status ARS Restrct Group Page Mic Disable Group Cover Remote Frwd Grp Calling...
  • Page 544 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-342 NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems, a user can activate Call Forwarding and Remote Call Forwarding by entering his or her home extension authorization code while at any telephone in the system;...
  • Page 545 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-343 Procedure: Authorization Codes Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Extensions menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables...

  • Page 546: Remote Call Forwarding

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-344 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Select Enter. 6. Erase the current authorization code (xxxxxxxxxxx). xxxx = extension entered in Step 4 Extension xxxx: Enter Authorization Code (2–11 digits, 0–9, *)
  • Page 547 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-345 If an extension with Remote Call Forwarding has one or more personal lines assigned, that extension can be assigned as the principal user, and calls received on that line are forwarded to outside numbers.
  • Page 548 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-346 PC Procedure Toggle letter R on/off or type ext. no. Procedure: Remote Call Forwarding Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Extensions menu. System Programming: >...

  • Page 549: Delayed Call Forwarding

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-347 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Specify the extension. If no DSS is attached: Remote Call Forward: Ã Enter extension SP: “Entering an Extension” If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or Backspace...
  • Page 550 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-348 Summary: Delayed Call Forwarding Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone 4d, MLX Telephone 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog...
  • Page 551 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-349 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 2. Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. Extensions: > Make a selection LinesTrunks RestrctCopy Line Copy Account Dial OutCd...

  • Page 552: Trunk-To-Trunk Transfer

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-350 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 7. Enter the number of delay rings. Extension xxxx: Enter Delay Rings (0–9) Ã Dial or type the number of delay rings: You may use Backspace to delete Backspace Next...
  • Page 553 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-351 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC 5d, Queued Call Console (QCC) Data Form 1a, Modem Data Workstation Data Form 1b, ISDN Terminal Adapter Data Workstation...

  • Page 554: Primary Cover Ring Delay

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-352 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer. Extensions: > Make a selection TrkTransfer ServiceObs Cover Delay Rotary Enable HotLine DisplayPref Exit 4.
  • Page 555 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-353 The delay, in addition to the Group Coverage Ring Delay, before sending calls to Group Coverage when the sender has Primary or Secondary Coverage and any receiver is available.
  • Page 556 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-354 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Go to the third screen of the Extensions menu. Extensions: > Make a selection LinesTrunks RestrctCopy Line Copy Account Dial OutCd...

  • Page 557: Secondary Cover Ring Delay

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-355 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 7. Erase the current number of rings (xx). xxxx = number entered in Step 5 Prim Cov Delay Ext xxxx: Enter number rings (1–6) Backspace Next...
  • Page 558 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-356 Factory Setting 2 rings Valid Entries 1–6 rings Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure More More Extensions Cover Delay Dial sender’s extension Dial Secondary Enter...
  • Page 559 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-357 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Cover Delay. Extensions: > Make a selection TrkTransfer ServiceObs Cover Delay Rotary Enable HotLine DisplayPref Exit 4.

  • Page 560: Group Coverage Ring Delay

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-358 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 8. Enter the number of rings before the call goes to Secondary Coverage (n = 1 to 6). Ã...
  • Page 561 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-359 Valid Entries 1–9 rings Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure More More Extensions Cover Delay Dial sender’s extension Dial no. Group Enter of rings (1 Enter Exit...
  • Page 562 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-360 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Select Group. Cover Delay Make a selection Primary Secondary Group Exit Enter 5. Specify the sender’s extension. Group Cover Ring Delay: If no DSS is attached: Enter extension...

  • Page 563: Hotline

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-361 HotLine Use this procedure to enable or disable the HotLine feature on a single-line telephone set or device. Summary: HotLine Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition...
  • Page 564 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-362 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Go to the third screen of the Extensions menu. Extensions: > Make a selection LinesTrunks RestrctCopy Line Copy Account Dial OutCd...

  • Page 565: Display Preference

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-363 Display Preference In Release 6.0 and later systems, use this procedure to specify display preferences for incoming inside calls or non-local dial plan calls that arrive on PRI tandem trunks.
  • Page 566 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-364 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Go to the third screen of the Extensions menu. Extensions: > Make a selection LinesTrunks RestrctCopy Line Copy Account Dial OutCd...

  • Page 567: Service Observing

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-365 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 7. Save your entry. Select Enter or Next. If you select Next to assign a display preference to the next extension in a sequence, repeat Step 5.
  • Page 568 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-366 Console Procedure To assign a Service Observer to a Service Observing group: More More Extensions ServiceObs Dial group no. (1 Dial Observer Enter –...
  • Page 569 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-367 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Go to the third screen of the Extensions menu. Extensions: > Make a selection LinesTrunks RestrctCopy Line Copy Account Dial OutCd...
  • Page 570 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-368 Assign a Service Observer Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the Service Observing group number (nn = 1 to 16). Service Observing: Enter group number (1–16) Backspace...
  • Page 571 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-369 Enable/Disable Warning Tone Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the Service Observing group number (nn = 1 to 16). Service Observing: Enter group number (1–16) Backspace Ã...
  • Page 572 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features 3-370 Assign Members to Service Observing Groups Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the Service Observing group number (nn = 1 to 16). Service Observing: Enter group number (1–16) Backspace...

  • Page 573: Optional Operator Features

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Operator Features 3-371 Optional Operator Features The summaries in this section affect feature programming for both DLC and QCC operator positions and include the following: Operator Hold Timer DLC Operator Automatic Hold QCC operator features are covered in the next section.
  • Page 574 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Operator Features 3-372 Procedure: Operator Hold Timer Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Operator menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator...

  • Page 575: Dlc Operator Automatic Hold

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Operator Features 3-373 DLC Operator Automatic Hold Use this procedure to enable or disable the DLC Operator Automatic Hold feature for DLC operator positions. When this feature is enabled, it prevents accidental call disconnection.

  • Page 576: Qcc Optional Features

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-374 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Select DLC Hold. System Operator: Make a selection Positions Queued Call Hold Timer DLC Hold Exit 3.

  • Page 577: Hold Return

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-375 Automatic or Manual Extended (Directed) Call Completion Return Ring Position Busy Backup Voice Announce NOTE: These options are available in Hybrid/PBX mode only. Hold Return Use this procedure to determine whether calls on hold are returned to the QCC queue or remain on hold, on the QCC operator console, after the hold timer has...
  • Page 578 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-376 Procedure: Hold Return Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Operator menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables...

  • Page 579: Automatic Hold Or Release

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-377 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Select Enter. 6. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit twice. Automatic Hold or Release Use this procedure to specify whether a call in progress (on a Call button) is automatically put on hold (Automatic Hold) or disconnected (Automatic Release) when the operator presses another button.
  • Page 580 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-378 Procedure: Automatic Hold or Release Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Operator menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options...

  • Page 581: Queue Over Threshold

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-379 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Select Enter. 6. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit two times. Queue over Threshold Use this procedure to specify the maximum number of calls (threshold) in the QCC queue before system operators are notified with a tone that the threshold...
  • Page 582 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-380 Procedure: Queue over Threshold Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Operator menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator...

  • Page 583: Elevate Priority

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-381 Cons Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 5. Enter the maximum number of calls allowed in QCC queue before operators are notified (nn = 0 to 99). Use 0 to specify that operators are not notified.
  • Page 584 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-382 Procedure: Elevate Priority Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Operator menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables...

  • Page 585: Calls-In-Queue Alert

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-383 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 5. Enter the number of seconds calls will wait in the queue before being reprioritized (nn = 5 to 30). Use 0 to specify that calls are not Ã...
  • Page 586 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-384 Procedure: Calls-In-Queue Alert Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Operator menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables...

  • Page 587: Qcc Operator To Receive Call Types

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-385 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 4. Enter the QCC extension to receive the calls-in-queue alert. If no DSS is attached: In Queue Alert: Ã...
  • Page 588 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-386 Calls programmed to return to the QCC queue (returning from directing, camped-on, held calls, and operator parked calls) Group Coverage calls Forward/Follow Me calls The QCC queue can be a receiver for the maximum number of coverage groups (30).
  • Page 589 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-387 Valid Entries Not applicable Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure Select a Operator Queued Call Call Types call type Dial coverage group no. Operator Dial ext.
  • Page 590 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-388 Cons Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Call Types. Queued Call Operator: > Make a selection Hold Rtrn InQue Alert HoldRelease Call Types Threshold Msg Center...
  • Page 591 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-389 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 2. Enter the group coverage number (nn = 1 to 30). Group Coverage Calls: Enter grp coverage number (1–30) Backspace Ã...
  • Page 592 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-390 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 7. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit five times. u Call Type Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1.

  • Page 593: Call Type Queue Priority Level

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-391 Call Type Queue Priority Level Use this procedure to assign a priority value (1 to 7) that determines the order in which calls programmed to ring into the QCC queue are sent to QCC system operator positions.
  • Page 594 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-392 Procedure: Call Type Queue Priority Level Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Operator menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber...
  • Page 595 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-393 Cons Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Select Priority. **** = option name selected in Step 4 **** Calls: Make a selection Priority If you did not select Group Coverage, go to Step 8.

  • Page 596: Message Center Operation

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-394 Message Center Operation Use this procedure to designate one or more QCC operator positions to operate as a message center. The following options are automatically set for the message center position: Incoming calls are not directed to this position Returning calls are directed to this position (return from extending and...
  • Page 597 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-395 Procedure: Message Center Operation Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Operator menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator...

  • Page 598: Extended (Directed) Call Completion

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-396 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Specify the QCC operator extension. If no DSS is attached: Operator Message Center: Ã Enter QCC operator SP: “Entering an Extension”...
  • Page 599 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-397 Summary: Extended (Directed) Call Completion Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 6a, Optional Operator Features Factory Setting Automatic Extended Completion Valid Entries...

  • Page 600: Return Ring

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-398 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Extended Completion. Queued Call Operator: > Make a selection Hold Rtrn InQue Alert HoldRelease Call Types Threshold Msg Center ElvatePrior...
  • Page 601 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-399 Summary: Return Ring Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 6a, Optional Operator Features Factory Setting 4 rings Valid Entries 1 to 15 rings...

  • Page 602: Position Busy Backup

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-400 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Return Ring. Queued Call Operator: Make a selection Hold Rtrn InQue Alert HoldRelease Call Types Threshold Msg Center ElvatePrior...
  • Page 603 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-401 Summary: Position Busy Backup Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 6a, Optional Operator Features Factory Setting No backup Valid Entries Calling group number...
  • Page 604 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-402 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Go to the second screen. Queued Call Operator: > Make a selection Hold Rtrn InQue Alert HoldRelease Call Types Threshold...

  • Page 605: Voice Announce

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-403 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 7. Assign or remove the group as QCC operator backup. Select Enter or Delete. You may continue to assign or remove calling groups as QCC operator backups by repeating Steps 2 and 3.
  • Page 606 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features 3-404 Procedure: Voice Announce Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Operator menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables...

  • Page 607: Optional Group Features

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features 3-405 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Select Enabled or Disabled. QCC Voice Announce: Make a selection Enabled Disabled Exit Enter 6. Save your entry. Select Enter.
  • Page 608 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features 3-406 Before reassigning an extension to a new group, you must remove it from its current group. Summary: Pickup Groups Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition...
  • Page 609 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features 3-407 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Enter the number of the pickup group (nn = 1 to 30). Call Pickup Groups: Enter group number (1–30) Backspace Ã...

  • Page 610: Group Paging

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features 3-408 Group Paging Use this procedure to assign or remove an extension from a paging group. A paging group consists of telephone users who hear common announcements over the telephone speakerphone.
  • Page 611 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features 3-409 Procedure: Group Paging Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Extensions menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables...

  • Page 612: Group Coverage Member Assignments

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features 3-410 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Select Enter. 6. Specify the extension. xxxx = number entered in Step 4 Group Page xxxx: Enter extensions If no DSS is attached:...
  • Page 613 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features 3-411 NOTE: This procedure assigns senders. Before you begin, make certain that the receivers for the coverage group are also programmed. Receivers can be assigned through individual or centralized telephone programming.
  • Page 614 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features 3-412 Procedure: Group Coverage Member Assignments Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Extensions menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options...

  • Page 615: Group Coverage Delay Interval

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features 3-413 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Select Enter. 6. Specify the extension. xx = number entered in Step 4 Group Cover xx Senders Enter extensions If no DSS is attached:...
  • Page 616 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features 3-414 Summary: Group Coverage Delay Interval Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 7c, Group Coverage Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries Extension numbers...

  • Page 617: Group Calling Member Assignments

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features 3-415 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Coverage Delay. Options: Make a selection Unassigned Cover Delay BehndSwitch Inter-Digit RecallTimer Ringing Freq Rotary SecNT Timer Exit 4.
  • Page 618 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features 3-416 NOTES: If a linear hunting pattern is indicated on the back of the system planning form (6d), be sure to assign extensions to the group in the exact order that they are shown on the form.
  • Page 619 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features 3-417 Procedure: Group Calling Member Assignments Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Extensions menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options...
  • Page 620 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features 3-418 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Enter the extension number of the calling group. ‘‘System Renumbering’’ on page 3-19 Group Calling: Enter extension number for the factory setting for extension of group numbers assigned to calling groups.

  • Page 621: Group Calling Line/Trunk Or Pool Assignments

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features 3-419 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 9. Continue to assign the extension to another calling group or go to Step 10. Select Next. Return to Step 7 to continue programming.
  • Page 622 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features 3-420 Procedure: Group Calling Line/Trunk or Pool Assignments Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Extensions menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber...
  • Page 623 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features 3-421 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Enter the extension of the calling group. Group Calling: Enter extension number of group Backspace à Exit Enter Dial or type [nnnn].

  • Page 624: Priority Call Queuing

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features 3-422 Priority Call Queuing Use this procedure to establish a supportive relationship between calling groups. Calls that arrive in one calling group (a home group) can be processed by another calling group (a support group) when no one from the first calling group is available to answer the call.
  • Page 625 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features 3-423 Procedure: Priority Call Queuing Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Extensions menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator...
  • Page 626 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features 3-424 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Enter the extension number of the group. Group Calling: Enter extension number of group Backspace Exit Enter Select Enter.

  • Page 627: Optional Group Calling Features

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-425 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 9. Enter the extension number of the support group. Group Calling: Enter Support group Delete Backspace Next Exit Enter...
  • Page 628 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-426 Linear Hunting Pattern. The system searches for an available group member in the order in which the extensions were assigned to the calling group.
  • Page 629 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-427 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. Extensions: > Make a selection LinesTrunks RestrctCopy Line Copy Account...

  • Page 630: Group Calling Delay Announcements

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-428 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 7. Specify the hunt pattern. xxxx = number entered in Step 5 Group Calling xxxx: Select one Circular Linear Select Circular,...
  • Page 631 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-429 Summary: Group Calling Delay Announcement Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 7d, Group Calling Factory Setting No delay announcement devices are assigned Valid Entries Primary Announcement, Secondary Announcement...
  • Page 632 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-430 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Group Calling. Extensions: Make a selection Ext Status ARS Restrct Group Page Mic Disable Group Cover Remote Frwd Grp Calling...

  • Page 633: Group Calling Announcement Interval

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-431 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 8. Enter the extension number of the announcement device. Group Calling xxxx: Enter extension numbers Announcement device of XXXXXXX Announcements XXXXXXX = Primary or Secondary nnnn...
  • Page 634 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-432 Factory Setting 0 (disabled) Valid Entries 900 seconds – Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure More Extensions Grp Calling Dial calling group ext. no. DelayAnnce Enter the Announcement Interval...
  • Page 635 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-433 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Group Calling. Extensions: Make a selection Ext Status ARS Restrct Group Page Mic Disable Group Cover Remote Frwd Grp Calling...

  • Page 636: Group Calling Repeat Announcement

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-434 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 8. Enter the announcement delay interval. nnn = announcement delay interval Group Calling xxxx: Enter interval between Announcements (0–900 sec) Backspace Next...
  • Page 637 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-435 Procedure: Group Calling Repeat Announcement Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Extensions menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber...
  • Page 638 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-436 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Enter the extension number of the calling group. GrpCall Delay Announce: Enter extension number of Group nnnn Backspace Ã...

  • Page 639: Group Coverage Receiver

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-437 Group Coverage Receiver Use this procedure to assign or remove a calling group as a receiver for a coverage group. Calling group member assignments must be made before you assign the group as a receiver for a coverage group.
  • Page 640 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-438 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. Extensions: > Make a selection LinesTrunks RestrctCopy Line Copy Account...

  • Page 641: Group Calling Overflow And Thresholds

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-439 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 7. Enter the coverage group for which you want to assign the calling group as receiver (nn = 1 to 30). xxx = number entered in Step 5 Group Calling xxxx: Enter coverage group...
  • Page 642 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-440 In Release 6.0 and later systems, a caller responds to a voice prompt by pressing the # key to indicate that his or her call should be handled as an overflow call.
  • Page 643 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-441 Drop Dial no. of seconds Based Overflow Yes or No Enter Prompt Based Overflow Enter Exit Exit Exit PC Procedure Type calling group ext.
  • Page 644 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-442 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Select Overflow. Group Calling: > Make a selection Hunt Type Queue Alarm DelayAnnce Xtnl Alert GrpCoverage Overflow Message...
  • Page 645 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-443 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 8. Enter the extension of the calling group or the QCC Listed Directory Number you want to assign for overflow coverage. xxxx = number entered in Step 5 Group Calling xxxx: Enter cover overflow...
  • Page 646 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-444 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 11. Erase the current number of calls (nn). xxxx = number entered in Step 5 Group Calling xxxx: Assign number of calls before overflow (1–99) Backspace...

  • Page 647: Group Calling Message-Waiting Indicator

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-445 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 18. Select Prompt Based Overflow. xxxx = number entered in Step 5 Group Calling xxxx: Select one Number Based Overflow Time Based Overflow Prompt Based Overflow...
  • Page 648 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-446 Message-waiting indications cannot be sent to the extension assigned to the group unless this option is programmed. The message-waiting receiver cannot distinguish between messages left for the calling group and personal messages.
  • Page 649 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-447 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. Extensions: > Make a selection LinesTrunks RestrctCopy Line Copy Account...

  • Page 650: Group Calling Calls-In-Queue Alarm Thresholds

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-448 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 7. Erase the current extension (nnnn). xxxx = number entered in Step 5 Group Calling xxxx: Enter message waiting extension nnnn...
  • Page 651 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-449 Summary: Group Calling Calls-In-Queue Alarm Thresholds Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 7d, Group Calling Factory Settings 1 call, for all Thresholds Valid Entries...
  • Page 652 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-450 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. Extensions: > Make a selection LinesTrunks RestrctCopy Line Copy Account...

  • Page 653: Group Calling External Alert For Calls-In-Queue Alarm

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-451 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 7. Select the Threshold number. Group Calling xxxx: Select one: Alarm Threshold 1 Alarm Threshold 2 Alarm Threshold 3 Exit 8.
  • Page 654 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-452 Only one external alert device can be designated for each calling group. Since the external alert signal is continuous, it is recommended that only light-type external alert devices be designated for the Calls-in-Queue alarm.
  • Page 655 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-453 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. Extensions: > Make a selection LinesTrunks RestrctCopy Line Copy Account...

  • Page 656: Group Type

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-454 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 7. Erase the current external alert extension (nnnn) if assigned. xxxx = number entered in Step 5 Group Calling xxxx: Enter external alert extension...
  • Page 657 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-455 Automatic Log In. Used for calling groups that consist of fax machines or data workstations (also called data hunt groups) to specify that the system automatically logs in calling group members after a power failure.
  • Page 658 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-456 Copy Option Console Procedure More More Extensions Grp Calling Dial calling group ext. no. Group Type Specify login type (Auto login, Auto logout, Enter Integrated VMI, or Generic VMI) Enter...
  • Page 659 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-457 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Go to the second screen of the Group Calling menu. Group Calling: > Make a selection Hunt Type Queue Alarm DelayAnnce...

  • Page 660: Queue Control

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-458 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 9. Save your entry. Select Enter or Next. Use Next to program the next calling group. Return to Step 8. 10.
  • Page 661 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-459 Auto-in tie trunks BRI (Basic Rate Interface) channels T1 facilities emulating ground-start or loop-start lines/trunks PRI facilities programmed for line-appearance routing When a call arrives on one of the above facilities, it is added to the calling group queue, even if that queue has reached or exceeded the programmed maximum number of calls.
  • Page 662 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-460 Procedure: Queue Control Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Extensions menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator...
  • Page 663 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features 3-461 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Select Queue Control. Group Calling: Make a selection Group Type Queue Ctrl Exit 6. Enter the extension number of the group. Group Calling: Enter extension number of group...

  • Page 664: Host System Dial Codes For Behind Switch Mode

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-462 System Features 3Programming Procedures This section contains programming summaries for the optional system features that affect all or most system users and includes the following: Transfer Return Time One-Touch Transfer/Hold Transfer Audible...

  • Page 665: Transfer Return Time

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-463 Transfer Return Time Use this procedure to specify the number of times the telephone rings before a call transferred to another inside telephone is returned to the originator. A setting of 0 means that transferred calls are never returned to the originator.
  • Page 666 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-464 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 2. Select Transfer. Options: > Make a selection Transfer Callback CampOn Ext Status CallParkRtn SMDR Delay Ring InsideDial Exit ReminderSrv 3.

  • Page 667: One-Touch Transfer/One-Touch Hold

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-465 One-Touch Transfer/One-Touch Hold Use this procedure to assign either the One-Touch Transfer or One-Touch Hold feature. One-Touch Transfer allows users to initiate transfers to another extension by pressing an Auto Dial or DSS button for that extension.
  • Page 668 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-466 To program One-Touch Hold: Options Transfer One Touch Hold Enter Exit Exit PC Procedure To program One-Touch Transfer: To program One-Touch Hold: Procedure: One-Touch Transfer/Hold Console Display/Instructions Additional Information...
  • Page 669 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-467 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Specify Transfer or Hold. One Touch Call Handling: Select One Transfer Hold Select Transfer Exit Enter or Hold. 5.

  • Page 670: Transfer Audible

    Composers, Artists, and Producers or Broadcast Music Incorporated). Magic On Hold requires no such license and can be purchased from Lucent Technologies. In Release 6.0 and later systems, when extensions are programmed to use the Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding feature, do not program Music-On-Hold as the transfer audible.
  • Page 671 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-469 Procedure: Transfer Audible Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Options menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables LinesTrunks...

  • Page 672: Type Of Transfer

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-470 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Select Enter. 6. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit twice. Type of Transfer Use this procedure to specify whether the system automatically selects an Intercom or System Access Ring or Voice button when the Transfer button or an Auto Dial or DSS button (for One-Touch Transfer) is pressed.
  • Page 673 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-471 Procedure: Type of Transfer Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Options menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables...

  • Page 674: Camp-On Return Time

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-472 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Select Enter. 6. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit twice. Camp-On Return Time Use this procedure to specify the number of seconds before a camped-on call (a call transferred to a busy telephone with the Camp-On feature) is returned to the originator.
  • Page 675 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-473 Procedure: Camp-On Return Time Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Options menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables...

  • Page 676: Call Park Return Time

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-474 Call Park Return Time Use this procedure to specify the number of seconds before a call put on hold with the Park feature is returned to the originator. Summary: Call Park Return Time Programmable by System Manager...
  • Page 677 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-475 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 2. Select Call Park Return. Options: > Make a selection Transfer Callback CampOn Ext Status CallParkRtn SMDR Delay Ring InsideDial Exit ReminderSrv...

  • Page 678: Delay Ring Interval

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-476 Delay Ring Interval Use this procedure to specify the number of rings for the delay ring interval. The delay ring interval is applied when a primary, secondary, or group cover button is set to delayed ring.
  • Page 679 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-477 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Select Delay Ring. Options: > Make a selection Transfer Callback CampOn Ext Status CallParkRtn SMDR Delay Ring InsideDial Exit ReminderSrv...

  • Page 680: Automatic Callback Interval

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-478 Automatic Callback Interval Use this procedure to specify the number of times the telephone rings at the originator’s telephone before the system cancels a Callback request. Summary: Automatic Callback Interval Programmable by System Manager...
  • Page 681 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-479 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Select Automatic Callback Interval. Options: > Make a selection Transfer Callback CampOn Ext Status CallParkRtn SMDR Delay Ring InsideDial Exit ReminderSrv...

  • Page 682: Extension Status

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-480 Extension Status Use this procedure to specify whether the Extension Status (ES) feature is used in Hotel mode or Group Calling/Call Management System (CMS) mode. The calling mode affects the meaning of the LEDs and the use of Auto Dial or DSS buttons when the DLC operator position is in Extension Status mode.

  • Page 683: Smdr Language

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-481 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Select Extension Status. Options: > Make a selection Transfer Callback CampOn Ext Status CallParkRtn SMDR Delay Ring InsideDial Exit ReminderSrv...
  • Page 684 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-482 Copy Option Console Procedure More Select language Language SMDR (English, French, or Spanish) Enter Exit PC Procedure Select language (English, French, or Spanish) Procedure: SMDR Language Console Display/Instructions Additional Information...

  • Page 685: Smdr Call Report Format

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-483 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Specify the SMDR language. SMDR Language: Select one English French Select English, Spanish French, Exit Enter or Spanish. 5.
  • Page 686 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-484 Copy Option Console Procedure Basic SMDR or Options SMDR Format ISDN SMDR Enter Exit Exit PC Procedure Procedure: SMDR Call Report Format Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1.

  • Page 687: Smdr Call Length

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-485 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Specify a format for the SMDR reports. SMDR Format: Select one Basic SMDR ISDN SMDR Select Basic SMDR Exit Enter or ISDN SMDR.
  • Page 688 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-486 Copy Option Console Procedure Drop Options SMDR Call Length Dial no. of seconds (0–255) Enter Exit Exit PC Procedure Type no. of seconds (0–255) Procedure: SMDR Call Length Console Display/Instructions...

  • Page 689: Smdr Calls Recorded On Call Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-487 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Erase the current number of seconds (xxx). SMDR Minimum Time: Enter minimum call time – 255) Backspace Exit Enter Press Drop.
  • Page 690 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-488 Console Procedure In/Out or Out Options SMDR Call Report Only Enter Exit Exit PC Procedure Procedure: SMDR Calls Recorded on Call Report Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1.

  • Page 691: Smdr Account Code Format

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-489 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Specify whether SMDR information is recorded for both incoming and outgoing calls or for outgoing calls only. SMDR Call Report: Select one In/Out...
  • Page 692 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-490 Procedure: SMDR Account Code Format Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Options menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator...

  • Page 693: Smdr Talk Time

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-491 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Press Enter. SMDR Talk Time In Release 4.2 and later systems, the Talk field was added to the SMDR call record.
  • Page 694 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-492 Procedure: SMDR Talk Time Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Options menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables...

  • Page 695: Smdr Udp Calls Recorded On Call Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-493 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Press Enter. SMDR UDP Calls Recorded on Call Report Use this procedure to specify whether SMDR information should be recorded for both incoming and outgoing calls on private network tandem trunks, or if call recording will not be performed on private network calls.
  • Page 696 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-494 Procedure: SMDR UDP Calls Recorded on Call Report Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Options menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber...

  • Page 697: Inside Dial Tone

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-495 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Select Enter. 6. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit twice. Inside Dial Tone Use this procedure to set the inside (system) dial tone to be either different from, or the same as the outside line/trunk dial tone.
  • Page 698 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-496 Procedure: Inside Dial Tone Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Options menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables...

  • Page 699: Reminder Service Cancel

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-497 Reminder Service Cancel Use this procedure to set the time of day when all programmed Reminder Service calls are automatically canceled. To deactivate Reminder Service Cancel, erase the currently programmed time and do not enter a new time.
  • Page 700 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-498 Procedure: Reminder Service Cancel Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Options menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables...

  • Page 701: Redirect Outside Calls To Unassigned Extension Numbers

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-499 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 6. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit. Redirect Outside Calls to Unassigned Extension Numbers Use this procedure to specify the extension number to receive redirected calls. Redirected calls include calls made to unassigned numbers by remote access users, by users on DID trunks (Hybrid/PBX only), or by users on dial-in tie trunks.

  • Page 702: Extension Numbers

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-500 PC Procedure To select QCC queue: To select extension or calling group: Type ext. no. or group no. Procedure: Redirect Outside Calls to Unassigned Extension Numbers Console Display/Instructions Additional Information...
  • Page 703 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-501 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Specify where to redirect calls made to unassigned extension numbers. Call Unassigned Ext: Select one QCC Queue Extension Select QCC Queue, Grp Calling...
  • Page 704 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-502 Group Calling Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the extension of the calling group to which calls are to be redirected. Unassign Calls Grp Call: Enter extension number of group...
  • Page 705 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-503 Copy Option Console Procedure More Select Options BehndSwitch feature Dial host system dial code (up to 6 Drop digits) Enter Exit Exit PC Procedure Select feature Type host system dial code (up to 6 digits)

  • Page 706: Recall Timer

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-504 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 4. Specify the feature to which you want to assign a dial code. Behind Switch: Make a selection Transfer Conference Select Transfer,...
  • Page 707 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-505 In a system operating in Behind Switch mode, the call is disconnected when the user presses the Recall button on an outside call. This indicates that the interval is too long and should be decreased to 350 milliseconds.

  • Page 708: Interdigit Timers

    6. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit. Interdigit Timers Programming for interdigit timers is reserved for Lucent Technologies technical support personnel or authorized dealers. Interdigit timers are used by the MERLIN LEGEND System to determine when a user originating an outside call has completed dialing the digits. The information is...

  • Page 709: Allowed Lists

    System Features 3-507 change the factory settings for interdigit timers unless instructed to do so by Lucent Technologies technical support or by an authorized dealer. Allowed Lists Use this procedure to establish Allowed Lists. These lists are telephone numbers that can be dialed from specified telephones, regardless of any calling restrictions assigned to the telephones.
  • Page 710 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-508 Procedure: Allowed Lists Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Tables menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables LinesTrunks...

  • Page 711: Assign Allowed Lists To Extensions

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-509 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Erase the current area code/exchange (nnnnnn). l = list number entered in Step 3 Allowed List l Entry e: Enter list item e = entry number entered in Step 3 nnnnnn...
  • Page 712 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-510 Console Procedure Dial list no. (0–7) Tables AllowTo Enter Dial ext. no. Enter Exit Exit PC Procedure Type list no. (0–7) Type ext. Procedure: Assign Allowed Lists to Extensions Console Display/Instructions Additional Information...

  • Page 713: Disallowed Lists

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-511 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Specify the extension to assign to the allowed list. x = list number entered in Step 3 Allow To List x: Enter extensions to list If no DSS is attached:...
  • Page 714 1809, 1900, and 976 or 1(wildcard)976. In Release 3.1 and later systems, Disallowed List number 7 does not include 800 and 1800 and 411 and 1411, but Lucent Technologies recommends that you add them. Assign all voice mail port extensions to this Disallowed List. Lucent Technologies recommends assigning Disallowed List number 7.
  • Page 715 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-513 Procedure: Disallowed Lists Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Tables menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables LinesTrunks...

  • Page 716: Assign Disallowed Lists To Extensions

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-514 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Erase the current telephone (n). l = list number entered in Step 3 Disallow List l Entry e: Enter list item e = entry number entered in Step 3 (12 digits maximum)
  • Page 717 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-515 Console Procedure Dial list no. (0–7) Tables DisallowTo Dial ext. no. Enter Enter Exit Exit PC Procedure Type list no. (0–7) Type ext. Procedure: Assign Disallowed Lists to Extensions Console Display/Instructions Additional Information...
  • Page 718 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures System Features 3-516 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Specify the extension to which you want to assign the disallowed list. x = list number entered in Step 3 Disallow To List x: Enter extensions to list If no DSS is attached:...

  • Page 719: Remote Access Features

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features 3-517 Remote Access Features This section covers the following Remote Access features: Remote Access over Networked Tandem and Tie Trunks (Release 6.0 and later systems only) Remote Access Trunk Assignment Remote Access Automatic Callback...
  • Page 720 Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.

  • Page 721: Remote Access Over Networked Tandem Pri And Tie Trunks

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features 3-519 Remote Access over Networked Tandem PRI and Tie Trunks In Release 6.0 and later systems, Hybrid/PBX mode only, an ARS call originating at a remote, private networked communications system can arrive on a networked tandem tie or PRI trunk of the local system and receive remote-access treatment automatically.

  • Page 722: Remote Access Trunk Assignment

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features 3-520 It is not necessary to assign private networked trunks for remote access. Callback for non-local trunk-to-trunk tandem calls does not work. Automatic Callback can be used at the local system when all private networked trunks are busy.
  • Page 723 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features 3-521 Summary: Remote Access Trunk Assignment Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 3a, Incoming Trunks: Remote Access Factory Setting Remote Access is not assigned Valid Entries...
  • Page 724 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features 3-522 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Select Remote Access. Lines and Trunks: > Make a selection LS/GS/DS1 TIE Lines Copy TT/LS Disc RemoteAccss Pools Exit...

  • Page 725: Remote Access Automatic Callback

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features 3-523 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 7. Continue to assign the remote access status to another line/trunk or go to Step 8. Select Next. Return to Step 6.
  • Page 726 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features 3-524 Procedure: Remote Access Automatic Callback Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Lines and Trunks menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber...

  • Page 727: Remote Access Without Barrier Codes

    SECURITY ALERT: Your system will be highly susceptible to toll fraud if you activate the Remote Access feature without barrier codes. Lucent Technologies does not recommend doing this except in cases where your remote-access trunks are being used by external users connected to a system that is in a private network with your own (Release 6.0 and later).
  • Page 728 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features 3-526 value assigned here is the opposite of the FRL value assigned to the ARS route, where a value of 0 is the least restrictive and a value of 6 is the most restrictive.
  • Page 729 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features 3-527 To assign/remove Disallowed Lists: Non-TIE or LinesTrunks RemoteAccss Dial list no. TIE Lines DisallowLst Enter Exit Exit Exit Exit PC Procedure To change calling restrictions: Select restriction To change ARS Facility Restriction Level:...
  • Page 730 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features 3-528 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 3. Specify whether you are establishing/removing a class of restrictions for non-tie lines/trunks or for tie and DID trunks. Remote Access (DISA): Make a selection LinesTrunks...
  • Page 731 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features 3-529 Restriction Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify the restriction type. **** Remote Access: Select one Unrestricted Outward restrict Toll Restrict Select Unrestricted, Outward Restrict, Exit...

  • Page 732: Remote Access Barrier Codes

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features 3-530 Allowed or Disallowed Lists Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the list you want to assign (n = 0 to 7). *** = option name selected in Step 3 *** Remote Access: **** = option name selected in Step 5...
  • Page 733 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features 3-531 enter a barrier code, but are denied access into the remote access trunks no matter what code is entered. SECURITY ALERT: Always use the longest length barrier code allowed on the system.
  • Page 734 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features 3-532 To change barrier code: LinesTrunks RemoteAccss BarrierCode Dial code ID Code Info Code Entry Drop Dial code Enter Enter Exit Exit Exit PC Procedure To establish or remove code requirements:...
  • Page 735 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features 3-533 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select an option. Select Non-TIE Remote Access (DISA): Make a selection or TIE Lines LinesTrunks AutoQueuing to specify whether barrier codes apply to non-tie or tie trunks and go to: Non-TIE...
  • Page 736 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features 3-534 Establish or Remove Barrier Code Requirements Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Select Barrier Code. **** Remote Access: **** = option name selected in Step 3 Make a selection BarrierCode DisallowLst...
  • Page 737 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features 3-535 Change Barrier Code Length Procedure When the systemwide barrier code length is changed, all barrier codes are erased and must be reassigned. Users are denied access to remote access trunks until new barrier codes are assigned.
  • Page 738 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features 3-536 Change Barrier Code Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the barrier code ID number (nn = 1 to 16). RemoteAccss BarrierCode: Enter Barriercode number –...

  • Page 739: Remote Access With Barrier Codes

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features 3-537 Remote Access with Barrier Codes Use this procedure to change the class of restriction for individual remote access barrier codes. The class of restriction assigned to each barrier code allows or denies the use of the following system features: Restriction.
  • Page 740 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features 3-538 Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure LinesTrunks RemoteAccss BarrierCode Dial barrier code no. Restriction Enter Select restriction Enter ARS Restrict Dial barrier code no. Drop Dial FRL Enter...
  • Page 741 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features 3-539 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Barrier Code Access. Remote Access (DISA): Make a selection LinesTrunks AutoQueuing Non-TIE TIE Lines BarrierCode Exit 4.
  • Page 742 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features 3-540 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 3. Specify a restriction. xx = barrier code number entered in Barrier Code xx: Select one Step 1 Unrestricted Outward Restrict Select Unrestricted,...
  • Page 743 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features 3-541 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Erase the current ARS FRL (n). xx = barrier code entered in Step 1 Barrier Code xx: Enter ARS Restriction –...

  • Page 744: Automatic Route Selection

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-542 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Enter the number of the Allowed List or Disallowed List you want to assign or remove (n = 0 to 7). xx = barrier code entered in Step 1 Barrier Code xx: Enter AllowedList access...

  • Page 745: Ars Over Private Networked Tandem Pri And Tie Trunks

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-543 Facility Restriction Level (FRL) Digit Absorption Other Digits N11 Special Numbers Tables Dial 0 Table Voice and/or Data Routing NOTE: ARS applies to Hybrid/PBX mode only. ARS over Private Networked Tandem PRI and Tie Trunks In Release 6.0 and later systems, Hybrid/PBX mode only, callers on one system...

  • Page 746: 7-Digit Dialing Requirements

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-544 Set up the subpatterns for the table. In doing so, you may wish to check with the remote system manager to ensure that routing will stipulate the most cost-effective timing based on the rates at the remote location.
  • Page 747 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-545 Summary: 1 + 7-Digit Dialing Requirements Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 3f, Automatic Route Selection Tables Factory Setting Not within area code Valid Entries...

  • Page 748: Ars Tables

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-546 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select ARS 1+7 Digit Dial. ARS: > Make a selection ARS 1+7Dial SubA Absorb ARS Input Sub A Digit Sub A Pools Sub B Start...
  • Page 749 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-547 Area code tables can contain only area codes. In Release 6.0 and later systems, these tables are often used to provide cost-efficient calling through private network lines/trunks connected to another system.
  • Page 750 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-548 Procedure: ARS Tables Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Tables menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables...
  • Page 751 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-549 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Select Enter. 6. Specify a table type. xx = table number entered in Step 4 ARS Table xx: Select one 6-Digit...

  • Page 752: Start And Stop Times For Subpatterns

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-550 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 12. Continue to enter area code or exchange for another table entry number or go to Step 13. Select Next.
  • Page 753 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-551 Factory Setting No time is specified, thus all calls are routed according to Subpattern A. Valid Entries 0000 to 2359 Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure Dial table no.
  • Page 754 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-552 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Subpattern B Start. ARS: > Make a selection ARS 1+7Dial SubA Absorb ARS Input Sub A Digit Sub A Pools Sub B Start Sub A FRL...
  • Page 755 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-553 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 9. Select Subpattern B Stop Time. This is also the start time for ARS: > Make a selection Subpattern A.

  • Page 756: Pool Routing

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-554 Pool Routing Use this procedure to identify the trunk pools on which to route calls to area codes and/or exchanges included in ARS tables. A maximum of six routes (numbered 1 through 6) can be specified for each subpattern.
  • Page 757 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-555 PC Procedure Type table no. and pool route no. Type pool dial-out code Procedure: Pool Routing Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Tables menu. System Programming: >...
  • Page 758 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-556 Subpattern A Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the table (nn = 1 to 18) and the pool route (m = 1 to 6) numbers. SubPattern A Pools: –...
  • Page 759 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-557 Subpattern B Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the table (nn = 1 to 18) and the pool route (m = 1 to 6) numbers. ARS Route Pattern: –...

  • Page 760: Facility Restriction Level

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-558 Facility Restriction Level Use this procedure to assign a Facility Restriction Level (FRL) to each route. The FRL ranges from 0 (least restrictive) to 6 (most restrictive) and is used to restrict user access to the route.
  • Page 761 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-559 Procedure: Facility Restriction Level Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Tables menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber SysRenumber Operator...
  • Page 762 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-560 Subpattern A Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the table (nn = 1 to 18) and the pool route (m = 1 to 6) numbers. Sub A Restriction Level: –...
  • Page 763 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-561 Subpattern B Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the table (nn = 1 to 18) and the pool route (m = 1 to 6) numbers. Subpattern B Restriction: –...

  • Page 764: Digit Absorption

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-562 Digit Absorption Use this procedure to specify how many of the digits dialed (0 through 11) by the caller should be absorbed (not sent to the telephone company’s central office) by the system when a call is made on an identified route.
  • Page 765 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-563 Procedure: Digit Absorption Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Tables menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables...
  • Page 766 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-564 Subpattern A Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the table (nn = 1 to 18) and the pool route (m = 1 to 6) numbers. Subpattern A Absorption: –...
  • Page 767 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-565 Subpattern B Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the table (nn = 1 to 18) and the pool route (m = 1 to 6) numbers. Sub B Absorption –...

  • Page 768: Other Digits

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-566 Other Digits Use this procedure to specify other (extra) digits that must be added by the system to the beginning of the number dialed by the caller when calls are placed on an identified route.
  • Page 769 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-567 Procedure: Other Digits Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Tables menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables...

  • Page 770: N11 Special Numbers Tables

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-568 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Select Enter. 6. Erase the current number of other digits (n). xx = table number entered in Step 4 ARS Table xx, Route x: >...
  • Page 771 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-569 (factory set to 70). The local system must prepend the ARS access code of the connected switch from which the calls will be directed to the public switched network.
  • Page 772 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-570 Procedure: N11 Special Numbers Tables Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Tables menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options...
  • Page 773 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-571 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Select an option. To change the current Facility Restriction ARS Specl Numbers Table: Make a selection Level, select ARS FRL and go to: ARS FRL Change FRL Procedure.

  • Page 774: Dial 0 Table

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-572 Other Digits Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Erase the current other digits (x). Special Numbers Digits: Enter other digits Backspace Exit Enter Press Drop.
  • Page 775 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-573 Planning Form 3g, Automatic Route Selection Default and Special Numbers Tables Factory Setting Valid Entries 0 to 6 Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure More Dial 0...
  • Page 776 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-574 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Go to the second screen of the ARS menu. ARS: > Make a selection ARS 1+7Dial SubA Absorb ARS Input Sub A Digit...
  • Page 777 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-575 ARS Pool Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Erase the current pool dial-out code (xxx). Dial 0 Pool: Enter pool dialout code Backspace Exit Enter...

  • Page 778: Voice And/Or Data Routing

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-576 ARS Digits Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Erase the current other digits (x). Dial 0 Other Digits Enter other digits Backspace Exit Enter...
  • Page 779 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-577 Console Procedure More Sub A Data or Sub B Tables Dial table no. and route no. Data Enter Select capability (Voice Only, Data Only, or Voice/ Data) Enter Exit...
  • Page 780 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 3-578 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Select Subpattern A or B. Tables: Make a selection Sub B FRL Dial 0 SubB Absorb Sub A Data Sub Digit Sub B Data...

  • Page 781: Uniform Dial Plan Routing

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing 3-579 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 10. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit twice. Uniform Dial Plan Routing This section includes programming procedures for assigning Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) Routing, available for Hybrid/PBX mode in Release 6.0 and later systems only.

  • Page 782: Udp Pool Routing

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing 3-580 UDP Pool Routing Before beginning this procedure, assign tandem tie or PRI trunks to pools. To do so, see ‘‘Trunks to Pools Assignment’’ on page 3-93.
  • Page 783 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing 3-581 Procedure: UDP Pool Routing Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Tables menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options...

  • Page 784: Udp Facility Restriction Level

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing 3-582 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 6. Save your entry. Select Enter. 7. Select Pool. xx = pattern number entered in Step 3 UDP Pattern xx Route x: Make a selection x = route number entered in Step 5...
  • Page 785 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing 3-583 FRLs assigned to extensions (or remote access) apply not only to ARS calls but also to calls for non-local dial plan extensions connected by private trunks to your local system.
  • Page 786 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing 3-584 Procedure: UDP Route Facility Restriction Level Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Tables menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber...
  • Page 787 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing 3-585 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 6. Save your entry. Select Enter. 7. Select FRL (Facility Restriction Level). xx = pattern number entered in Step 3 UDP Pattern xx Route x: Make a selection x = route number entered in Step 5...

  • Page 788: Udp Digit Absorption

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing 3-586 UDP Digit Absorption Use this procedure to specify how many of the digits dialed (0 to 11) by the caller should be absorbed (not sent over the trunk) by the system when a UDP call to a non-local extension is made on an identified route.
  • Page 789 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing 3-587 Procedure: UDP Digit Absorption Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Tables menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options...
  • Page 790 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing 3-588 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Enter the route number (n = 1 to 4). xx = pattern number entered in Step 3 UDP Pattern xx: –...

  • Page 791: Udp Other Digits

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing 3-589 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 12. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit four times. UDP Other Digits Use this procedure to specify other (extra) digits that must be added by the system to the beginning of the dialed digits when calls are placed on an identified route.
  • Page 792 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing 3-590 Console Procedure Dial pattern no. (1–20) Tables UDP Routing Dial route no. (1–4) Enter Enter Digits Drop Dial digits to add (up to 20; any combination of 0–9) Enter Exit...
  • Page 793 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing 3-591 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 5. Enter the route number (n = 1 to 4). xx = pattern number entered in Step 3 UDP Pattern xx: –...

  • Page 794: Udp Voice And/Or Data Routing

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing 3-592 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 11. Save your entry. Select Enter. 12. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit four times. UDP Voice and/or Data Routing Use this procedure to route voice, data, or voice and data.
  • Page 795 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing 3-593 Procedure: UDP Voice and/or Data Routing Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the Tables menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber...
  • Page 796 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing 3-594 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Enter the route number (n = 1 to 4) . xx = pattern number entered in Step 3 UDP Pattern xx: –...

  • Page 797: Night Service

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Night Service 3-595 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 11. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit four times. Night Service The procedures in this section cover how to program the following optional Night Service features: Night Service Group Assignment Night Service with Outward Restriction...
  • Page 798 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Night Service 3-596 Inspect Yes (extensions only) Copy Option Console Procedure To assign a calling group to a Night Service group: NightSrvce GroupAssign Calling Group Dial ext.
  • Page 799 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Night Service 3-597 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Select Group Assignment. Night Service: Make a selection GroupAssign Start OutRestrict Stop Emergency Time Control ExcludeList Cover Control Exit 3.
  • Page 800 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Night Service 3-598 Extensions Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Specify the extension you want to assign to the Night Service group. xxxx = number entered in Step 4 Night Serv Group xxxx: Enter extension If no DSS is attached:...

  • Page 801: Night Service With Outward Restriction

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Night Service 3-599 Calling Group Procedure. Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the extension of the calling group to be added. xxxx = number entered in Step 4 Night Serv Group xxxx: Enter group call ext Delete...
  • Page 802 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Night Service 3-600 This procedure is also used to establish the following lists: Emergency Allowed List. A list of telephone numbers that can be dialed without a password.
  • Page 803 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Night Service 3-601 Procedure: Night Service with Outward Restriction Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select the NightService menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options...
  • Page 804 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Night Service 3-602 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Select Enter. If you removed the password requirement, you have completed this procedure. 6. Select Emergency Allowed List. Night Service: If you do not wish to enter an Emergency Make a selection...
  • Page 805 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Night Service 3-603 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 11. Continue to assign a telephone number to the next emergency list item or go to Step 12. Select Next.

  • Page 806: Night Service With Time Set

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Night Service 3-604 Night Service with Time Set Use this procedure to specify the time of day and the days of the week when Night Service is to be activated and deactivated.
  • Page 807 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Night Service 3-605 Console Procedure To add or change start/stop time: Drop Dial start day (0–6) NightSrvce Start and time (0000–2359) Drop Dial Enter Stop stop day and time Enter Exit...
  • Page 808 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Night Service 3-606 Add or Change Start Time Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Erase the current start day and time (xxxxx) if assigned. Night Serv Start: –...

  • Page 809: Night Service With Coverage Control

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Night Service 3-607 Activate/Deactivate Night Service Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 1. Turn Night Service On or Off. Select On to turn Night Service on. Night Serv Time Control: Select Off to turn Night Service off.
  • Page 810 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Night Service 3-608 Valid Entries Enable or Disable Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure Enable or NightSrvce CoverContrl Disable Enter Exit PC Procedure Procedure: Night Service with Coverage Control Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1.

  • Page 811: Labeling

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Labeling 3-609 Labeling The procedures in this section cover how to add or change labels for the following: Extension Directory Lines or Trunks Posted Message Group Calling System Speed Dial Directory Programming on the system programming console:...
  • Page 812 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Labeling 3-610 Summary: Extension Directory Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries Not applicable Inspect...
  • Page 813 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Labeling 3-611 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Directory. Labeling Make a selection Directory LinesTrunks PostMessage Grp Calling Exit 4. Select Extension. Directory: Make a selection System Extension Personal...

  • Page 814: Lines Or Trunks

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Labeling 3-612 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 8. Enter a label for the extension. Use Punctuation to toggle between letters and punctuation. Ã Dial or type the label. 9.
  • Page 815 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Labeling 3-613 Procedure: Lines or Trunks Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber...

  • Page 816: Posted Message

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Labeling 3-614 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Select Enter. 6. Erase the current label (AAAAAAA) if assigned. xxx = number entered in Step 4 L xxx Enter new label AAAAAAA Punctuation...
  • Page 817 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Labeling 3-615 Summary: Posted Messages Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 8a, Label Form: Posted Message Factory Setting First 10 messages Valid Entries 1 to 20 Inspect...
  • Page 818 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Labeling 3-616 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Posted Message. Labeling Make a selection Directory LinesTrunks PostMessage Grp Calling Exit 4. Enter the posted message number (nn = 1 to 20). Posted Message: Enter the message number –...

  • Page 819: Group Calling

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Labeling 3-617 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 8. Save your entry. Select Enter. (Use , not Change additional messages by repeating Steps 4 through 8. 9. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit twice.
  • Page 820 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Labeling 3-618 Procedure: Group Calling Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber...

  • Page 821: System Speed Dial Directory

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Labeling 3-619 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Save your entry. Select Enter. 6. Erase the current label (AAAAAAA), if assigned. xxxx = number entered in Step 4 GrpCl xxxx: Enter new label AAAAAAA Punctuation...
  • Page 822 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Labeling 3-620 Summary: System Speed Dial Directory Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 8b, System Speed Dial Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries 600 to 729 Inspect...
  • Page 823 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Labeling 3-621 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Select the Labeling menu. System Programming: Make a selection Labeling Language Data Print Cntr-Prg Exit 3. Select Directory. Labeling Make a selection Directory...
  • Page 824 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Labeling 3-622 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 7. Erase the current label (AAAAAAA) if assigned. xxx = code entered in Step 4 Entry xxx: Enter new name AAAAAAA Punctuation Enter...

  • Page 825: Print Reports

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Print Reports 3-623 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 12. Save your entry. Select Enter. (Use , not 13. Select a display option. Displ no. while dialing? If you want the dialed telephone number to display when using the System Enter...
  • Page 826 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Print Reports 3-624 Summary: Report Language Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form 1, System Planning Factory Setting English Valid Entries English, French, Spanish Inspect Copy Option...

  • Page 827: Printing System Reports

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Print Reports 3-625 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Printer. Language Make a selection SystemLang Extensions SMDR Printer Exit 4. Specify a language for the reports. Printer Language: Select one English...
  • Page 828 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Print Reports 3-626 System Dial Plan — Pools — Telephone Paging Zones — Direct Group Calling — Lines/Trunks — Stations (Extensions) Label Information — Telephone Personal Directory —...
  • Page 829 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Print Reports 3-627 Allowed Lists Assigned to Extensions Disallowed Lists Disallowed Lists Assigned to Extensions Automatic Route Selection Tables Extension Directory System Directory Group Page Extension Information Group Coverage Group Calling...
  • Page 830 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Print Reports 3-628 Save reports (on hard disk or floppy). View reports (browse). Chapter ‘‘Programming with SPM,” for details. Summary: Printing System Reports Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition...
  • Page 831 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Print Reports 3-629 Procedure: Printing System Reports Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions...
  • Page 832 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Print Reports 3-630 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information The All option prints each available Print More report and takes several minutes Make a selection to complete. GrpCoverage Error Log Grp Calling...

  • Page 833: Data Features

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Data Features 3-631 Extension Information Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Enter the number of the extension for which you want a report (nnnn). Extension Info Enter extension number Backspace Ã...

  • Page 834: Analog Multiline Telephones At Data Workstations

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Data Features 3-632 Table 3-7. Other Data Programming Procedures — Continued Procedure Location Ringing Options ‘‘Ringing Options’’ on page 4-37 Assign Data Hunt Group ‘‘Group Calling Member Assignments’’ on page Members 3-415 Assign Data Hunt Group...
  • Page 835 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Data Features 3-633 Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries Extension numbers of analog sets Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure More Dial ext. no. Data Voice/Data Enter Exit PC Procedure...

  • Page 836: 2B Data

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Data Features 3-634 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 4. Enter the voice (odd-numbered) extension number of the pair (nnnn). The system automatically assigns the Data Voice/Data Enter voice/data pair data (even-numbered) extension.
  • Page 837 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Data Features 3-635 Summary: 2B Data Programmable by System Manager Mode Key, Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Required Planning Form Data Form 2b, Digital Data Workstation Factory Setting None Valid Entries Adjunct extension number up to four digits...
  • Page 838 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Data Features 3-636 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select 2xB Data. Data: Please make a selection Voice/Data 2xB Data Exit 4. Enter the adjunct extension number of an MLX port (xxxx). 2xB Data/Video: >...

  • Page 839: Memory Card

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Memory Card 3-637 Memory Card A PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) interface slot is present on the processor module. The slot is a standard interface through which information can be added to or obtained from the system using a memory card.
  • Page 840 Figure 3-4 shows a sample Translation card. INSERT LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES PROPRIETARY THIS MEMORY CARD CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES THAT IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OR USED EXCEPT IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE AGREEMENTS. COPYRIGHT © 1993 LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Figure 3-4.

  • Page 841: Inserting The Card

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Memory Card 3-639 Inserting the Card To insert the card, hold the card with the Lucent logo facing up and the arrow pointing toward the slot. See Figure 3-5 for the proper way to insert the memory card into the slot on the processor module.

  • Page 842: Memory Card Formatting

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Memory Card 3-640 Memory Card Formatting The memory card may have to be formatted before you begin any manual or automatic backup procedures. This section details the screens and messages that appear during the format procedure.
  • Page 843 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Memory Card 3-641 Format Warning Format Memory Card: All data on card will be DELETED. Do you want to continue? Exit This screen appears if you respond to the system prompt to format the memory card.

  • Page 844: Backup

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Memory Card 3-642 Backup Use this procedure to make a copy of your customized system data. You should create a backup at least three times during system installation (so that programmed information is not lost) and once after each system upgrade, service technician visit, or major system reconfiguration.
  • Page 845 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Memory Card 3-643 NOTE: If the system performs a System Erase (frigid start), all programming is set to the factory-set values. If a previous backup file is available, perform a restore.
  • Page 846 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Memory Card 3-644 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Select the System menu. System Programming: > Make a selection System Extensions SysRenumber Options Operator Tables LinesTrunks AuxEquip Exit NightSrvce...
  • Page 847 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Memory Card 3-645 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 6. Rename the backup file (n = 1 to 11 characters). x = backup file selected in Step 5 Backup File: Enter name BACKx.mmdd mm/dd = current month and day...

  • Page 848: Automatic Backup

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Memory Card 3-646 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 9. Observe the backup progress screen. filename = file selected in Step 5 or Backup filename: Backup in Progress, entered in Step 6 Please Wait.
  • Page 849 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Memory Card 3-647 If any type of programming is taking place at an extension during the automatic backup procedure, the backup is canceled. The system does not re-attempt the backup.
  • Page 850 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Memory Card 3-648 PC Procedure To program daily backup: Insert memory card Type time (00–23; 00–59) To program weekly backup: Insert memory card Type day and time (0–6;00–23; 00–59) Procedure: Automatic Backup Console Display/Instructions...
  • Page 851 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Memory Card 3-649 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information 5. Make a selection. Auto MemCard Backup: Select one Daily Select Off, Weekly Daily, Exit Enter or Weekly. 6.
  • Page 852 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Memory Card 3-650 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 2. Enter the time when you want the automatic backup to run every day. (hh = 00 to 23, mm = 00 to 59). Daily MemCard Backup: –...

  • Page 853: Backup Messages

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Memory Card 3-651 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Save your entry. Select Enter. 4. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Exit twice. Backup Messages During manual or automatic backup procedures, additional screens may appear to alert you to problems with the translation memory card, the backup file, or the backup procedure.
  • Page 854 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Memory Card 3-652 Card Removed While Backup Is in Progress The Memory Card is not inserted or is inserted incorrectly while a backup is in progress.

  • Page 855: Restore

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Memory Card 3-653 CAUTION: The Memory Card may be write-protected to avoid the accidental erasure of the backup files. Make certain this is not the case before you change the Write-Protect Tab.
  • Page 856 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Memory Card 3-654 extension appears on the screen. Repeat the restore procedure when the busy extension becomes idle. If a line is busy (incoming call or active call) when you begin the restore procedure, the restore is canceled and the number of the first active line appears on the screen.
  • Page 857 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Memory Card 3-655 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 3. Select Back/Restore. System: Make a selection Restart MaintenBusy SProg Port Date Mode Time Board Renum Back/Restore Exit 4.
  • Page 858 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Memory Card 3-656 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 7. Observe the restore file validation screen. Memory Card Restore: File is being validated. 8. Respond to the prompt. Restore n: n = filename selected in Step 5 System will be down ...

  • Page 859: Restore Messages

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Memory Card 3-657 Restore Messages During the restore procedure, additional screens may appear to alert you to problems with the translation Memory Card, the backup file or the restore procedure.
  • Page 860 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Memory Card 3-658 Wrong System Programming Port n = filename selected Restore n: xxxx = system programming port Change Sys Programming extension Port to Extension xxxx before Restoring.
  • Page 861 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Memory Card 3-659 Card Failure after Confirmation n = filename selected Restore n: Restore Failure RESTORE IS CANCELED. System is DOWN. If the restore fails because the card is damaged, the system performs a System Erase (frigid start).
  • Page 862 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Programming Procedures Memory Card 3-660 A mismatch exists between the hardware components present on the current system and the hardware components reflected in the backup file. The restore is aborted.

  • Page 863: Centralized Telephone Programming

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Overview Centralized Telephone Programming Overview This chapter describes centralized telephone programming for the system manager and includes the following information: Accessing centralized telephone programming Programming the features available with this function Programming a single telephone Copying programmed features from one extension to another extension...

  • Page 864: Introduction

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Introduction Introduction Centralized telephone programming allows the system manager to program any feature that can be programmed by individual telephone users, or by the system operator, onto another telephone in the system.

  • Page 865: Access To Centralized Telephone Programming

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Access to Centralized Telephone Programming Access to Centralized Telephone Programming Access the Centralized Programming menu from the System Programming menu. Centralized programming is performed by selecting features from the display or by using programming codes.

  • Page 866: Program Extension

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension The sections that follow explain the use of menu selections for programming a single extension (Program Extension), and for using one extension as a template for programming several extensions of the same type (Copy Extension).
  • Page 867 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select Program Extension. Centralized Programming: Make a selection Program Ext Copy Ext Exit Enter 2. Specify the extension you want to program. Centralized Programming: Enter extension Backspace...

  • Page 868: Programming Codes

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Console Display/Instructions Additional Information If you are programming a telephone with more than 20 line buttons, use Page 2 to select line button 21 and above. See Appendix E for button diagrams of all telephones.
  • Page 869 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Table 4-1. Telephone Programming Codes — Continued Feature Programming Code Automatic Line Selection Begin Sequence End Sequence **14 1, 2 Barge-ln Callback Automatic **12 Selective...
  • Page 870 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Table 4-1. Telephone Programming Codes — Continued Feature Programming Code ETR Drop *777 for ETR or MLS telephones Extension Status Direct-Line Console *760 Status Off Status 1...
  • Page 871 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Table 4-1. Telephone Programming Codes — Continued Feature Programming Code Messaging Leave Message Message LED off (for non-display telephones) *54 (Used to enter/exit Message Message operation mode (for ETR, operation mode.
  • Page 872 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension 4-10 Table 4-1. Telephone Programming Codes — Continued Feature Programming Code Privacy On Recall *775 Reminder Service **81 Cancel *752 Missed Ringing/Idle Line Preference *343 *344 Ringing Options...

  • Page 873: Using The List Feature Menu

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension 4-11 Table 4-1. Telephone Programming Codes — Continued Feature Programming Code System Speed Dial *24 + code (600–729) Transfer *774 Voice Announce **10 VA on Idle Only *130...

  • Page 874: Copy Extension

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Copy Extension 4-12 The Find Feature screen is shown below. Choose Starting Letter Press HOME to Exit PQRS WXYZ Press the button or function key that corresponds to the first letter of the feature you want.
  • Page 875 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Copy Extension 4-13 Table 4-2. Features that Can Be Copied: All Telephones Analog Feature Telephones Telephones Telephones Telephones Account Code Entry Authorization Code Auto Answer All Auto Answer Intercom Auto Dial Inside Auto Dial Outside...
  • Page 876 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Copy Extension 4-14 Table 4-2. Features that Can Be Copied: All Telephones — Continued Analog Feature Telephones Telephones Telephones Telephones Group Calling Group Page Headset Auto Answer Headset Hang Up Headset Status...
  • Page 877 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Copy Extension 4-15 Table 4-2. Features that Can Be Copied: All Telephones — Continued Analog Feature Telephones Telephones Telephones Telephones Scroll More Secondary Coverage Signaling System Speed Dial Transfer...
  • Page 878 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Copy Extension 4-16 Use the procedure below to copy programming from one extension to another. Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 1. Select Copy Extension. Centralized Programming: Make a selection Program Ext Copy Ext...

  • Page 879: Feature Quick Reference

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-17 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information 5. Continue to copy line assignments from the copy extension shown to another extension or go to Step 7. Select Enter or Next.

  • Page 880: Alarm

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-18 Alarm Assign a button to alert the operator to system problems. Summary: Alarm Telephones DLC operator only Mode Programmable by DLC operator and system manager Programming Code *759...

  • Page 881: Auto Answer Intercom

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-19 Auto Answer Intercom Assign a button to answer both inside and outside calls without lifting the handset. Summary: Auto Answer Intercom Telephones Analog multiline only Mode...

  • Page 882: Barge-In

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-20 Summary: Automatic Line Selection Telephones Analog multiline, MLX telephones, MLS telephones, ETR telephones Mode Programmable by Users and system manager Programming Code Enter: *14 Exit: **14...

  • Page 883: Caller Number And Name On Caller Id

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-21 Summary: Automatic Callback Telephones Mode Programmable by Users and system manager Programming Code On: *12 Off: **12 Display Label Cback Auto On/Off Summary: Selective Callback Telephones Mode...

  • Page 884: Call Waiting

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-22 Call Waiting With Call Waiting turned on, a user on a call will know that another call is waiting. The person at the extension hears one beep for a waiting inside call, two for an outside call.

  • Page 885: Conference

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-23 Conference Assign a button to access the host system conference feature. Summary: Conference Telephones Analog multiline, MLX (except QCC), MLS, and ETR telephones Mode Behind Switch...

  • Page 886: Data Status

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-24 Programming Code In/Outside Calls: *48 Outside Calls Only: **48 Display Label CoverInside, On/Off Summary: Sender Buttons, Coverage Off This procedure turns off all Coverage. Telephones Analog multiline, MLX (except QCC), MLS, and ETR telephones...

  • Page 887: Direct Voice Mail

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-25 Direct Voice Mail This feature allows one user to call another user’s voice mail, without ringing that user’s telephone. Summary: Direct Voice Mail Telephones Mode Programmable by...

  • Page 888: Extension Status

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-26 In Behind Switch mode for analog multiline, MLX, MLS, and ETR telephones, rather than using a fixed drop button, program code *773 must be used to send a drop signal to the MERLIN LEGEND System.

  • Page 889: Feature Button

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-27 Feature Button Use in conjunction with features that require dial codes. Summary: Feature Button Telephones Analog multiline Mode Programmable by Users and system manager Programming Code Display Label...

  • Page 890: Calling Group Supervisor

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-28 Calling Group Supervisor Assign buttons to allow the calling group supervisor to monitor the number of calls in the queue or to change calling group members’ availability to take calls. Summary: Calling Group Supervisor Telephones Analog multiline, MLX-28D, MLX-20L...

  • Page 891: Headset

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-29 Headset Program headset buttons on MLX telephones only. Summary: Headset Auto Answer Assign a button to automatically answer a ringing call. Telephones MLX telephones only Mode...

  • Page 892: Last Number Dial

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-30 Summary: Headset Status Assign a button to activate headset operation. Telephones MLX telephones only Mode Programmable by Users and system manager Programming Code *782 Display Label...
  • Page 893 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-31 Summary: Leave Message–Message LED Off Telephones Analog multiline, MLX, MLS, and ETR telephones Mode Programmable by Users and system manager Programming Code Display Label none...

  • Page 894: Night Service

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-32 Summary: Receiving Messages–Next Telephones Analog multiline display, MLS, and ETR telephones Mode Programmable by Users and system manager Programming Code Display Label Messages Next Msg Summary: Receiving Messages–Return Call...

  • Page 895: Notify

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-33 Notify Assign buttons to allow users to send a visual signal to another extension without making a call to that extension. Summary: Notify–Send and Receive Telephones Analog multiline, MLX, MLS, and ETR telephones...

  • Page 896: Park Zone Auto Dial

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-34 Park Zone Auto Dial Assign a button to allow DLC operators to hold a call at a specified extension or park zone.

  • Page 897: Privacy

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-35 Programming Code General: *9 Specific line or ext.: *9 + line no./ext. no. + Enter Group: *88 Display Label General Use, Specific Extension, Specific Line: Pickup General/Extension/Line Group: Pickup Group Privacy...

  • Page 898: Reminder Service

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-36 Reminder Service Assign buttons to allow the system to make calls automatically at preset times and cancel reminder service calls and operator reminder calls that were not answered. Summary: Set, Cancel, or Missed Reminder Service Telephones...

  • Page 899: Ringing Options

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-37 Ringing Options Summary: Personalized Ringing Use this procedure to individualize the telephone ring. Telephones Analog multiline, MLX, MLS, and ETR telephones Mode Programmable by Users and system manager...

  • Page 900: Saved Number Dial

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-38 Summary: Abbreviated Ringing Options Use this procedure to turn abbreviated ringing on or off. Telephones Analog multiline, MLX, MLS, and ETR telephones Mode Programmable by Users and system manager...

  • Page 901: Send/Remove Message

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-39 Send/Remove Message Assign a button to allow the system operator to turn the Message LED on or off for any telephone connected to the system. Summary: Send/Remove Message Telephones DLC operator only...

  • Page 902: System Access/Intercom Buttons

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-40 Signaling Assign a button to allow a user to send an audible signal to another extension without making a call to that extension. Summary: Signaling (manual) Telephones Analog multiline, MLX, MLS, and ETR telephones...

  • Page 903: System Speed Dial

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-41 Summary: Assign Shared System Access Buttons Telephones Mode Hybrid/PBX Programmable by System manager only Programming Code *17 + primary ext. no. Display Label ShareSysAcc Summary: Change Type of System Access Button...

  • Page 904: Transfer

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference 4-42 Transfer Assign a button to access the host system Transfer feature. Summary: Transfer Telephones Analog multiline, MLX, MLS, and ETR telephones Mode Behind Switch Programmable by...

  • Page 905: Customer Support Information

    In the USA only, Lucent Technologies provides a toll-tree customer Helpline (1-800-628-2888) 24 hours a day. If you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system, call the Helpline or your Lucent Technologies representative. Consultation charges may apply. Outside the USA, if you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system, contact your Lucent Technologies representative.

  • Page 906: Canadian Department Of Communications (Doc Interference Information

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Customer Support Information Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) Interference Information Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) Interference Information This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.
  • Page 907 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Customer Support Information FCC Notification and Repair Information • If there are no directly terminated trunks, or if the only directly terminated facilities are personal lines, report the number AS5USA-65646-PF-E.

  • Page 908: Installation And Operational Procedures

    FCC. In the event repairs are needed on this equipment, contact your authorized Lucent Technologies dealer or, in the USA only, contact the National Service Assistance Center (NSAC) at 1-800-628-2888.

  • Page 909: Doc Notification And Repair Information

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Customer Support Information DOC Notification and Repair Information This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded back to the Public Switched Telephone Network. Permissible exceptions are when: —...

  • Page 910: Ministère Des Communications Du Canada Et La Réparation

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Customer Support Information Renseignements sur la Notification du Ministère des Communications du Canada Users should ensure, for their own protection, that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected.
  • Page 911 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Customer Support Information Renseignements sur la Notification du Ministère des Communications du Canada suite de réparations ou de modifications effectuées par l’utilisateur ou à cause de mauvais fonctionnement. Pour sa propre protection, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer que tous les fils de mise à...

  • Page 912: Security Of Your System: Preventing Toll Fraud

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Customer Support Information Security of Your System: Preventing Toll Fraud MERLIN LEGEND D.O.C. Ministère des Communications Location Label Placement du Canada emplacement de l’étiquette Security of Your System: Preventing Toll Fraud As a customer of a new telephone system, you should be aware that there is an increasing problem of telephone toll fraud.
  • Page 913 Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.

  • Page 914: Toll Fraud Prevention

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention A-10 Deactivate all unassigned codes promptly. Ensure that Remote Access users are aware of their responsibility to keep the telephone number and any access codes secure. When possible, restrict the off-network capability of off-premises callers, using calling restrictions, Facility Restriction Levels (Hybrid/PBX mode only), and Disallowed List capabilities.
  • Page 915 In any event, it is not advisable to give anyone access to network facilities or operators, or to dial a number at the request of the caller. Any time a call appears to be suspicious, call the Lucent Technologies BCS Fraud Intervention Center at 1-800-628-2888 (fraud intervention for ®...

  • Page 916: Security Risks Associated With Transferring Through Voice Messaging Systems

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention A-12 Security Risks Associated with Transferring through Voice Messaging Systems Toll fraud hackers try to dial into a voice mailbox and then execute a transfer by dialing *T.
  • Page 917 1809, 1900, and 976 or 1 (wildcard) 976. In Release 3.1 and later systems, Disallowed List number 7 does not include 800, 1800, 411, and 1411, but Lucent Technologies recommends that you add them. NOTE: Assign all voice mail port extensions to this Disallowed List. Lucent Technologies recommends assigning Disallowed List number 7.

  • Page 918: Security Risks Associated With The Automated Attendant Feature Of Voice Messaging Systems

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention A-14 Security Risks Associated with the Automated Attendant Feature of Voice Messaging Systems Two areas of toll fraud risk associated with the Automated Attendant feature of voice messaging systems are: Pooled facility (line/trunk) access codes are translated to a menu prompt to allow Remote Access.

  • Page 919: Security Risks Associated With The Remote Access Feature

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention A-15 facilities used for RCF to ground-start line/trunks. Usually, a charge applies for this change. Also, hardware and software changes may be necessary in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System.

  • Page 920: Other Security Hints

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Customer Support Information Other Security Hints A-16 If Remote Access is used, an upgrade to MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 3.0 is encouraged to take advantage of the longer barrier code. Other Security Hints Make sure that the Automated Attendant selector codes do not permit outside line selection.

  • Page 921: Educating Operators

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Customer Support Information Other Security Hints A-17 Never discuss your telephone system’s numbering plan with anyone outside the company. Educating Operators Operators or attendants need to be especially aware of how to recognize and react to potential hacker activity.

  • Page 922: Establishing A Policy

    Change the access password regularly and issue it only to authorized personnel. Disconnect the maintenance port when not in use. (This however, eliminates Lucent Technologies’ 24-hour maintenance surveillance capability and may result in additional maintenance costs.) Create a communications system management policy concerning employee turnover and include these suggestions: —...

  • Page 923: Physical Security

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Customer Support Information Other Security Hints A-19 Choosing Passwords Passwords should be the maximum length allowed by the system. Passwords should be hard to guess and should not contain: All the same numbers (for example, 1111, 666666).
  • Page 924 Warranty Date that your system is not in good working order, Lucent Technologies will, without charge to you, repair or replace, at its option, the system components that are not in good working order. Repair or replacement parts may be new or refurbished and will be provided on an exchange basis.

  • Page 925: Limitation Of Liability

    PURPOSE. Limitation of Liability Except as provided below, the liability of Lucent Technologies and its affiliates and suppliers for any claims, losses, damages, or expenses from any cause whatsoever (including acts or omissions of third parties), regardless of the form of action, whether in contract, tort, or otherwise, shall not exceed the lesser of: (1) the direct damages proven;...
  • Page 926 A-22 Under applicable tariffs, you will be responsible for payment of toll charges. Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit resulting from unauthorized access. To reduce the risk of unauthorized access through Remote Administration and...
  • Page 927 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Menu Hierarchy Overview Menu Hierarchy Overview The system programming menu hierarchy details the sequence of menu screens that appear when you select the system programming options. The choice of an option on the first menu screen leads to either a second menu screen or a data- entry screen.
  • Page 928 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Menu Hierarchy Overview...
  • Page 929 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 LED Displays Overview LED Displays Overview Table C-1 defines LED status on the MLX-20L console. LED status is indicated on the LEDs next to the 20 buttons below the display area on the system programming console.
  • Page 930 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 LED Displays Overview Table C-1. Line or Trunk Status for MLX-20L Console LED Status System Green LED Red LED Programming Menu Option Option FLASHING FLASHING Lines Trunks Tie Lines Inmode Incoming...
  • Page 931 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 LED Displays Overview Table C-1. Line or Trunk Status for MLX-20L Console — Continued LED Status System Green LED Red LED Programming Menu Option Option FLASHING FLASHING Lines Trunks Hold Long-450...
  • Page 932 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 LED Displays Overview Table C-2. Telephone Feature Status for DSS Console Only System Red LED Status Programming Menu Option Option FLASHING WINK Extensions Account Forced Forced (FACE) Account Code Account Code Entry...
  • Page 933 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 LED Displays Overview Table C-2. Telephone Feature Status for DSS Console Only — Continued System Red LED Status Programming Menu Option Option FLASHING WINK Extensions Remote Telephone Telephone Frwd can transfer...
  • Page 934 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 LED Displays Overview Table C-2. Telephone Feature Status for DSS Console Only — Continued System Red LED Status Programming Menu Option Option FLASHING WINK Operator Direct Operator Other Can be Trunk...

  • Page 935: Telephone Programming

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming General Feature Use Information General Feature Use and Telephone Programming This appendix contains information on the general use of features for the MLX, ETR, MLS, analog multiline, and single-line telephones.

  • Page 936: Programmed Buttons

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming General Feature Use Information Programmed Buttons Any unlabeled line button on multiline telephones can be programmed with a feature for one-touch activation. See Table D-4 through Table D-8...

  • Page 937: Telephone And Operator Features

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone and Operator Features Feature Codes Feature codes are 1-, 2-, and 3-digit codes that activate features. A feature code is used by first pressing the dedicated Feature button on MLX telephones, pressing a programmed Feature button on analog multiline telephones, or dialing # on single-line telephones.
  • Page 938 Table D-1. Telephone and Operator Features for MLX Telephones Feature 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- Feature Prog Code Code Display 7-Line Display 5D/10D 5/10 Account Code Entry 82 + code K P B K P B K P B Acct AccountCode Alarm K P B...
  • Page 939 Table D-1. Telephone and Operator Features for MLX Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- Feature Prog Code Code Display 7-Line Display 5D/10D 5/10 Call Waiting K P B K P B K P B K P B CWait CallWaiting **11...
  • Page 940 Table D-1. Telephone and Operator Features for MLX Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- Feature Prog Code Code Display 7-Line Display 5D/10D 5/10 Extension Status Direct-Line Console Status Off 760 + DSS K P B K P B *760 OPES, ESOff OperatorES,...
  • Page 941 Table D-1. Telephone and Operator Features for MLX Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- Feature Prog Code Code Display 7-Line Display 5D/10D 5/10 Forward and Follow Me K P B K P B K P B K P B Activate Forward (inside) 33 + ext.
  • Page 942 Table D-1. Telephone and Operator Features for MLX Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- Feature Prog Code Code Display 7-Line Display 5D/10D 5/10 Group Calling ln-Queue Alarm button *22 + calling K P B K P B K P B K P B GrpCl...
  • Page 943 Table D-1. Telephone and Operator Features for MLX Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- Feature Prog Code Code Display 7-Line Display 5D/10D 5/10 Intercom buttons Assign buttons ICOM (Default Ring) SysAccess ICOM Originate Only Change button type SysAcc-00 Ring Voice...
  • Page 944 Table D-1. Telephone and Operator Features for MLX Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- Feature Prog Code Code Display 7-Line Display 5D/10D 5/10 Night Service K P B K P B Night Night Srvc Notify K P B K P B K P B K P B...
  • Page 945 Table D-1. Telephone and Operator Features for MLX Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- Feature Prog Code Code Display 7-Line Display 5D/10D 5/10 Recall K P B K P B K P B K P B *775 Recll Recall Reminder Service...
  • Page 946 Table D-1. Telephone and Operator Features for MLX Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- Feature Prog Code Code Display 7-Line Display 5D/10D 5/10 Ringing Options RngOp RingOptions Individual lines K P B K P B K P B K P B 1Line One Line...
  • Page 947 Table D-1. Telephone and Operator Features for MLX Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- Feature Prog Code Code Display 7-Line Display 5D/10D 5/10 System Access buttons Assign buttons SA (Default Ring) SysAccess SA Originate Only SysAcc-00 Shared SA *17 + primary ShareSysAcc ext.
  • Page 948 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone and Operator Features D-14 Table D-2. Telephone and Operator Features for Analog Multiline and Single-Line Telephones Feature 2-Line Analog Single- Feature Prog Code Code...
  • Page 949 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone and Operator Features D-15 Table D-2. Telephone and Operator Features for Analog Multiline and Single-Line Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line Analog Single- Feature...
  • Page 950 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone and Operator Features D-16 Table D-2. Telephone and Operator Features for Analog Multiline and Single-Line Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line Analog Single- Feature...
  • Page 951 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone and Operator Features D-17 Table D-2. Telephone and Operator Features for Analog Multiline and Single-Line Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line Analog Single- Feature...
  • Page 952 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone and Operator Features D-18 Table D-2. Telephone and Operator Features for Analog Multiline and Single-Line Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line Analog Single- Feature...
  • Page 953 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone and Operator Features D-19 Table D-2. Telephone and Operator Features for Analog Multiline and Single-Line Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line Analog Single- Feature...
  • Page 954 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone and Operator Features D-20 Table D-2. Telephone and Operator Features for Analog Multiline and Single-Line Telephones — Continued Feature 2-Line Analog Single- Feature...
  • Page 955 Table D-3. Telephone and Operator Features for ETR and MLS Telephones Feature Feature Prog Code Code ETR Display MLS Display Account Code Entry 82 + code K P B K P B Acct: Acct? Authorization Code K P B K P B Auth: Auth? Auto Dial...
  • Page 956 Table D-3. Telephone and Operator Features for ETR and MLS Telephones — Continued Feature Feature Prog Code Code ETR Display MLS Display Coverage K P B K P B Coverage Coverage Cover inside and outside Cover Inside On calls Cover outside calls only **48 Cover Inside Off Receiver buttons...
  • Page 957 Table D-3. Telephone and Operator Features for ETR and MLS Telephones — Continued Feature Feature Prog Code Code ETR Display MLS Display Forward and Follow Me K P B K P B Activate Forward (inside) 33 + ext. no. Forward Forward Remote Call Forward 33 + tel no.
  • Page 958 Table D-3. Telephone and Operator Features for ETR and MLS Telephones — Continued Feature Feature Prog Code Code ETR Display MLS Display Intercom buttons K P B K P B Assign buttons ICOM (Default Ring) SysAccess SysAccess ICOM Originate Only SysAcc-00 SysAcc-00 Change button type...
  • Page 959 Table D-3. Telephone and Operator Features for ETR and MLS Telephones — Continued Feature Feature Prog Code Code ETR Display MLS Display Notify K P B K P B Notify Send *757 + ext. no. Send Notify Send Receive *758 + ext. no. Receive notify Recv Paging...
  • Page 960 Table D-3. Telephone and Operator Features for ETR and MLS Telephones — Continued Feature Feature Prog Code Code ETR Display MLS Display Ringing Options K P B K P B RingOptions RingOptions Individual lines K P B K P B One Line Immediate ring K P B...
  • Page 961 Table D-3. Telephone and Operator Features for ETR and MLS Telephones — Continued Feature Feature Prog Code Code ETR Display MLS Display System Speed Dial *24 + code K P B K P B 600-729 SysSpeedDl SysSpeedDial (600-729) Transfer *774 Trans Voice Announce K P B...

  • Page 962: Programming Methods

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming D-28 Telephone Programming The following describes how to program features on MLX, ETR, MLS, and analog multiline telephones. Because Personal Speed Dial is the only feature that single- line telephone users can program, general programming instructions for single- line telephones are not provided.
  • Page 963 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming D-29 Table D-4. Programming Analog Multiline Telephones Step Action Label the button. Remove the clear label cover from the telephone: insert the end of a paper clip in the notch at the top of the cover.
  • Page 964 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming D-30 Table D-5. Programming ETR and MLS Telephones Step Action Label the button. Remove the clear label cover from the telephone: pull up on the tab that extends from the top of the cover.
  • Page 965 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming D-31 Table D-6. Programming MLX-10 and MLX-5 Nondisplay Telephones Step Action Label the button. Remove the clear label cover from the telephone: pull up on the tab that extends from the top of the cover.
  • Page 966 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming D-32 Table D-7. Programming MLX Telephones by Using the Display Step Action Label the button to be programmed. Remove the clear label cover from the telephone by pulling up on the tab that extends from the top of the cover.
  • Page 967 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming D-33 Table D-7. Programming MLX Telephones by Using the Display — Continued Step Action Select the feature. If the feature name is on the display: Press the button next to or below the name of the feature to be programmed.
  • Page 968 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming D-34 Table D-8. Programming TransTalk MDC 9000 and MDW Telephones Step Action Label the button to be Remove the clear label cover from the telephone programmed.
  • Page 969 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Button Diagrams Overview Button Diagrams Overview This appendix contains the button diagrams for Hybrid/PBX, Key, and Behind Switch systems. SA Orig. Only Ring Ring Figure E-1. MLX-20L and MLX-28D Telephone (Hybrid/PBX Mode)
  • Page 970 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Button Diagrams Overview Voice Ring Figure E-2. MLX-16DP Telephone (Hybrid/PBX Mode) Voice Ring Figure E-3. MLX 5- and 10-Button Telephone (Hybrid/PBX Mode)
  • Page 971 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Button Diagrams Overview 22 BUTTON 10 BUTTON 5 BUTTON Orig Only Voice Ring Figure E-4. Analog Multiline Telephone (Hybrid/PBX Mode)
  • Page 972 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Button Diagrams Overview Icom Voice Icom Ring Key Mode: Up to 8 personal line Behind Switch Mode: buttons are assigned One prime line button beginning at button 3. is assigned to button 3.
  • Page 973 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Button Diagrams Overview Icom Voice Icom Ring Behind Switch Mode: One prime line is assigned to button 3. Figure E-7. MLX 5- and 10-Button Telephone (Key and Behind Switch Modes) 34 BUTTON 22 BUTTON 10 BUTTON...
  • Page 974 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Button Diagrams Overview These buttons not used in MERLIN LEGEND system More 32 SA O 33 SA V 34 SA R Figure E-9. ETR-34D Telephone (Hybrid/PBX Mode) These buttons not used in MERLIN LEGEND system More 32 SA O...
  • Page 975 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Button Diagrams Overview 32 SA O 33 SA V 34 SA R Figure E-11. ETR-6 Telephone (Hybrid/PBX Mode) 32 SA O 33 SA V 34 SA R Figure E-12.
  • Page 976 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Button Diagrams Overview 32 SA O 33 SA V 34 SA R Figure E-13. MLS-18D Telephone (Hybrid/PBX Mode) Do not use these buttons for any facilities or features that require LEDs.
  • Page 977 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Button Diagrams Overview These buttons not used in MERLIN LEGEND system 28 Line 5 More 29 Line 4 30 Line 3 31 Line 2 32 Line 1 25 Line 8 33 Icom V 26 Line 7...
  • Page 978 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Button Diagrams Overview E-10 32 Line 1 33 Icom V 30 Line 3 34 Icom R 31 Line 2 Figure E-18. ETR-6 Telephone (Key Mode) 29 Line 4 30 Line 3 31 Line 2 25 Line 8...
  • Page 979 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Button Diagrams Overview E-11 30 Line 3 25 Line 8 31 Line 2 26 Line 7 32 Line 1 27 Line 6 33 Icom V 28 Line 5 34 Icom R 29 Line 4 Figure E-20.
  • Page 980 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Button Diagrams Overview E-12 These buttons not used in MERLIN LEGEND system More 32 Prime 33 Icom V 34 Icom R Figure E-23. ETR-34D Telephone (Behind Switch Mode) These buttons not used in MERLIN LEGEND system More 32 Prime...
  • Page 981 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Button Diagrams Overview E-13 32 Prime 33 Icom V 34 Icom R Figure E-25. ETR-6 Telephone (Behind Switch Mode) 32 Prime 33 Icom V 34 Icom R Figure E-26.
  • Page 982 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Button Diagrams Overview E-14 Do not use these buttons for any facilities or features that require LEDs. 32 Prime 33 Icom V 34 Icom R Figure E-28. MLS-12/12D Telephone (Behind Switch Mode) 33 Icom V 32 Prime 34 Icom R...
  • Page 983 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Sample Reports Overview Sample Reports Overview This appendix includes samples of the print reports generated by the communications system. Table F-1 lists the system reports and the pages in this appendix where samples can be found.
  • Page 984 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Sample Reports Overview Table F-1. Sample Report Pages For... See... System Information Report Dial Plan Report Label Information Report F-42 Tie Trunk Information Report F-13 DID Trunk Information Report F-14 GS/LS Trunk Information Report F-15...
  • Page 985 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Sample Reports Overview Table F-2. System Reports Menu Option Report Name Description Prints each of the reports available on the Print menu, from SysSet-up to Error Log. NOTE: With selected, four trunk information reports automatically print.
  • Page 986 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Sample Reports Overview Table F-2. System Reports — Continued Menu Option Report Name Description Operator Information For each system operator position: logical ID, Oper Info extension number, label, type (DLC or QCC). All general system operator options, such as backup position;...
  • Page 987 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Sample Reports Overview Table F-2. System Reports — Continued Menu Option Report Name Description System Directory System Speed Dial number, label and Sys Direct telephone number in System Directory, and whether number should display.
  • Page 988 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Sample Reports Overview Table F-2. System Reports — Continued Menu Option Report Name Description BRI Information Service Profile ID and Directory Number for BRI Info each BRI line, flexible timers, and fixed timers and counters.

  • Page 989: System Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Sample Reports System Information Report System Information Report Print Menu Option: SysSet-up SYSTEM INFORMATION Current Date: 01/04/00 Current Time: 00:21:15 System : Mode AutoMaintBusy AutoBusyTie Hybrid/PBX Disable Disable Language: SystemLang...
  • Page 990 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Sample Reports System Information Report System Information Report— Continued Slot # 1: 008 MLX Slot # 2: Slot # 3: Slot # 4: Slot # 5: 800 GS/LS Slot # 6: 008 GS/LS-MLX Slot # 7:...

  • Page 991: Dial Plan Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Sample Reports Dial Plan Report Dial Plan Report Print Menu Option: Dial Plan Sections: Pools; Telephone Paging Zones; Direct Group Calling Group; Lines/Trunks; Stations DIAL PLAN FOR POOLS POOL.# POOL.# POOL.#...
  • Page 992 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Sample Reports Dial Plan Report F-10 Dial Plan Report—Continued DIAL PLAN FOR STATIONS STN #: OPERATR STN #: STN #: STN #: STN #: STN #: STN #: EXT 13 STN #: STN #:...
  • Page 993 Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Sample Reports Dial Plan Report F-11 Dial Plan Report—Continued ID #: 45 4044 3034 ID #: 46 4045 3035 ID #: 47 4046 3036 ID #: 48 4047 3037 ID #: 49...

  • Page 994: Label Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Sample Reports Label Information Report F-12 Label Information Report Print Menu Option: Labels Sections: Telephone Personal Directory; Posted Messages and Numbers LABEL INFORMATION Executive Telephone # Personal Directory Name Number Display...

  • Page 995: Tie Trunk Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Sample Reports Tie Trunk Information Report F-13 Tie Trunk Information Report Print Menu Option: Trunk Info and TIE TIE TRUNK INFORMATION TRUNK XXX Slot/Port : ss/pp TIE-PBX or Toll Direction : 2 Way E&M Signal: Type1S Dialtone...

  • Page 996: Did Trunk Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Sample Reports DID Trunk Information Report F-14 DID Trunk Information Report Print Menu Option: Trunk Info and DID DID TRUNK INFORMATION Trk SS/PP Blk DiscTime Type ExpDig DelDig AddDig Signal InvDest 841 13/ 1...

  • Page 997: Gs/Ls Trunk Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Sample Reports GS/LS Trunk Information Report F-15 GS/LS Trunk Information Report Print Menu Option: Trunk Info and Loop/Ground GS/LS TRUNK INFORMATION SS/PP Type OutMode RelDisc ChannelUnit LS-ID Delay 2/ 1 Loop TouchTone...

  • Page 998: General Trunk Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Sample Reports General Trunk Information Report F-16 General Trunk Information Report Print Menu Option: Trunk Info and General 4/ 1 No Remote Long GENERAL TRUNK INFORMATION Trk SS/PP RemAccess Pool TlPrfx HldDisc Principal QCC Extern Prty Oper Switch...

  • Page 999: Switch 56 Data Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Sample Reports Switch 56 Data Information Report F-17 Switch 56 Data Information Report Print Menu Option: Trunk Info and S56 Data Dial Plan Routing for Network Service Expected Digits: Digits to Delete: 0 Digits to Add:...

  • Page 1000: Ds1 Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Sample Reports DS1 Information Report F-18 DS1 Information Report Print Menu Option: T1 Info DS1 SLOT ATTRIBUTES Slot Type Format Supp Signal LineComp ClkSync Active Rob Bit Prim Loop Rob Bit...

  • Page 1001: Pri Information Report

    Issue 1 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 7.0 System Programming 555-670-111 April 1999 Sample Reports PRI Information Report F-19 PRI Information Report Print Menu Option: PRI Info Sections: Network Selection, Special Service, Call-by-Call and Dial Plan Routing Tables; PRI Information NOTE: The B-Channels are printed in the order in which they are searched.

Table of Contents